GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) 2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M€¦ · · 2011-10-24GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate ... GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011

Black plate (1,1)GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011

2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-8Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-50Universal Remote System . . . . 5-58

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-36Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-32Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-43Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-68Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-74Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87Conversions andAdd-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . 10-102


2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-12

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-15Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, and SIERRAare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCDivision wherever it appears in thismanual.

If the vehicle has the Duramax®

Diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25965915 A First Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel (Base/UplevelVersion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Instrument Panel (PremiumVersion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Sensing System forPassenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-18Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-25Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-26Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-29Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Universal Remote System . . . 1-29Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-31Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-31Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-32Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-32Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Version)


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑10.

B. Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 6‑5 .

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 .

C. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑32.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑5 .

E. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑13.

F. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑43.

Tow/Haul Selector Button(If Equipped). See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑49.

Range Selection Mode (AllisonTransmission and Hydra-Matic®

6‐Speed Button (If Equipped).See Manual Mode onpage 9‑48.

G. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7.

H. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1 .

I. Integrated Trailer BrakeController (If Equipped). SeeTrailer Towing on page 9‑91.

J. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 .

K. Data Link Connector (DLC).See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑25.

L. Hood on page 10‑5.

M. Parking Brake on page 9‑66.

N. Dome Lamps on page 6‑7.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑6(If Equipped).


1-4 In Brief

O. Cruise Control on page 9‑71.

P. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

Q. Horn on page 5‑5.

R. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 (If Equipped).

S. Automatic Transfer CaseControl (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive onpage 10‑30.

T. Ashtray (If Equipped). SeeAshtrays on page 5‑12 andCigarette Lighter on page 5‑11.

U. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑68 (If Equipped).

Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑74 (If Equipped).

Pedal Adjust Button(If Equipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9‑33.

Exhaust Brake (if Equipped).See "Brakes" in the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

V. Power Outlets on page 5‑10.

W. Climate Control Systems (withAir Conditioning) on page 8‑1or Climate Control Systems(with Heater Only) onpage 8‑4 (If Equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑5(If Equipped) .

X. Power Take Off (PTO) Control(If Equipped). See Power TakeOff (PTO) in the Duramax dieselsupplement Index.

Y. Passenger Airbag Off Control(If Equipped). See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑36.

Z. Glove Box on page 4‑1.


In Brief 1-5

2 NOTES


1-6 In Brief

Instrument Panel (Premium Version)


In Brief 1-7

A. Air Vents on page 8‑10.

B. Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 6‑5 .

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 .

C. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑13.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑5 .

E. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑43.

F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑49(If Equipped).

G. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑32.

H. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7.

I. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 .

J. Integrated Trailer BrakeController (If Equipped). SeeTrailer Towing on page 9‑91.

K. Dome Lamps on page 6‑7 .

L. Automatic Transfer CaseControl. (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive onpage 10‑30.

M. Data Link Connector (DLC).See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑25.

N. Hood on page 10‑5.

O. Parking Brake on page 9‑66.

P. Cruise Control on page 9‑71.

Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

R. Horn on page 5‑5.

S. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 .

T. Climate Control Systems (withAir Conditioning) on page 8‑1or Climate Control Systems(with Heater Only) onpage 8‑4 (If equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑5 (IfEquipped).

U. Power Outlets on page 5‑10.

Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped).See Ashtrays on page 5‑12and Cigarette Lighter onpage 5‑11.

V. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑68 (If Equipped).

Pedal Adjust Button (IfEquipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9‑33.

Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑74 (If Equipped).

Exhaust Brake (if Equipped).See "Brakes" in the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

W. Passenger Airbag Off Control(If Equipped). See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑36.

X. Glove Box on page 4‑1.


1-8 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 andRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.


In Brief 1-9

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 .

Door LocksThere are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door. Frominside, use the power door locks orthe manual door locks. To lock orunlock the door with the manuallocks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.

Power Door Locks

If available, these switches arelocated on the front doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Remove the key from theignition and press to lock the doors.

For more information, see:. Automatic Door Locks on

page 2‑8 .. Safety Locks on page 2‑8.

WindowsTurn the hand crank on each doorto manually raise or lower themanual windows.

Power Windows

Crew Cab Shown

If available, the power windowswitches are located on each of theside doors in the front and rear.

The driver door has a switch for thepassenger window and rearwindows.


1-10 In Brief

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see:. Windows on page 2‑18.. Power Windows on page 2‑18.

Power Sliding Rear Window

On vehicles with a power slidingrear window, the switch is located inthe overhead console. See RearWindows on page 2‑19.

The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually. Pushor pull the switch to open or closethe window.

Seat Adjustment

Front Seats

Manual Seats

On vehicles with a manual seat, itcan be moved forward or rearward.

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked inplace.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.

Power Seats

On vehicles with power seats, thecontrols are on the outboard side ofthe front seats.

Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.


In Brief 1-11

Raise or lower the front or rear partof the cushion by moving the frontor rear part of the control upor down.

Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3 for more information.

Manual Lumbar

On vehicles with manual lumbar, theknob is on the outboard side ofthe seat.

Increase or decrease lumbarsupport by turning the knob forwardor rearward.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 for more information.

Power Lumbar

On vehicles with power lumbar, thecontrol is on the outboard side ofthe seat.

On vehicles with two-way lumbar,press and hold the top of the controlto increase lumbar support. Todecrease, press and hold thebottom of the control.

On vehicles with four-way lumbar,press and hold the front of thecontrol to increase lumbar support.To decrease, press and hold therear of the control. To raise theheight of the support, press andhold the top of the control. To lower,press and hold the bottom of thecontrol.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 for more information.


1-12 In Brief

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

On vehicles with manual recliningseatbacks, the lever is on theoutboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

On vehicles with power recliningseatbacks, the control is on theoutboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, tilt the topof the control rearward.

To bring the seatback forward, tiltthe top of the control forward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driverdoor are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seat,outside mirrors, and the adjustablethrottle and brake pedals, if thevehicle has this feature.


In Brief 1-13

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat andseatback recliner, both outsidemirrors, and the throttle andbrake pedals, if available.

See Power Mirrors onpage 2‑15 and AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9‑33 for more information.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottles and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall the memory positions,press and release “1” or “2.” Thevehicle must be in P (Park). A singlebeep will sound. The seat, outsidemirrors, and adjustable throttle andbrake pedals, if available, will moveto the position previously stored forthe identified driver.

See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, andPedals” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3 andVehicle Personalization (with DICButtons) on page 5‑50 for moreinformation.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

The easy exit driver seat featurecan move the seat rearward to allowextra room to exit the vehicle.

B : Press to recall the easy exitseat position. The vehicle must bein P (Park).

See “Memory Seat, Mirrors, andPedals” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3 andVehicle Personalization (with DICButtons) on page 5‑50 for moreinformation.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are located on thedriver and passenger doors.

I : Press to heat theseatback only.

J : Press to heat the seat andseatback.

The light on the button will come onto indicate that the feature isworking. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settings ofhigh, medium, and low and to turnthe heat to the seat off. Indicatorlights will show the level of heatselected: three for high, two formedium, and one for low.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9 .


1-14 In Brief

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belt

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑12.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑15.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑20.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑55.

Sensing System forPassenger AirbagThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, turns off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driverairbags, seat‐mounted side impactairbags and roof‐rail airbags are notaffected by this.

If the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position unlessthere is an airbag off switch locatedin the glove box.

If there is an airbag off switch, thevehicle does not have a passengersensing system. See Airbag On-OffSwitch on page 3‑36 for moreinformation.


In Brief 1-15

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicleis started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑39 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorsand foldaway mirrors have controlslocated on the driver door.

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑14or Power Mirrors on page 2‑15.

If the vehicle has towing mirrors,they can be adjusted for a clearerview of the objects behind you.Manually pull out the mirror head toextend it for better visibility whentowing a trailer. See Trailer-TowMirrors on page 2‑14.

Power Foldaway Mirrors

To fold the mirrors:

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2‑15.


1-16 In Brief

Interior Mirror

Vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror can be adjusted to see clearlybehind the vehicle. Hold the mirrorin the center to move it up or downand side to side. To reduceheadlamp glare during nighttimeuse, pull the tab forward for daytimeuse and push it for nighttime use.

Vehicles with the automatic dimmingfeature will automatically reduce theglare of lights from behind thevehicle. The dimming feature comeson and the indicator light illuminateseach time the vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑17 for moreinformation.

Steering WheelAdjustment

The tilt lever is located on the lowerleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentOn vehicles with this feature, youcan change the position of thethrottle and brake pedals.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controlsystem.


In Brief 1-17

Press the arrow at the bottom of theswitch to move the pedals closer toyour body. Press the arrow at thetop of the switch to move the pedalsaway from your body.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9‑33.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob clockwise to thefarthest position to turn on the domelamps. The dome lamps remain onuntil the knob is turnedcounterclockwise.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k : Press the button in and thedome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again toreturn it to the extended position sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with reading lamps inthe overhead console, press thebutton located next to the lamp toturn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

For more information about interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑7.. Reading Lamps on page 6‑8.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑7.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.


1-18 In Brief

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and daytime runninglamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO: Automatically turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,and license plate lamps.

;: Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, instrument panel lights,and license plate lamps.

2: Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, instrumentpanel lights, and license platelamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1 .. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑3 .. Fog Lamps on page 6‑6.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

8 : Single wipe, turn to8, thenrelease. Several wipes, hold theband on8 longer.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

] : Slow wipes.

? : Fast wipes.

L : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 .


In Brief 1-19

Climate ControlsThese systems control the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning)

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Air Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger


1-20 In Brief

Climate Control System (With Heater Only)

A. Fan Control



See Climate Control Systems (withAir Conditioning) on page 8‑1 orClimate Control Systems (withHeater Only) on page 8‑4.


In Brief 1-21

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

B. Fan Control

C. AUTO

D. Defrost

E. Air Recirculation

F. Outside Air

G. Air Delivery Mode Control

H. Display

I. Power Button

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑5.

TransmissionRange Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode switch,if equipped, is located on the shiftlever. To enable the RangeSelection feature, move the columnshift lever to the M (Manual)position. The current range willappear next to the M. This is thehighest attainable range with alllower gears accesfible. As anexample, when 5 (fifth) gear isselected, 1 (First) through 5 (fifth)gears are available.


1-22 In Brief

Press the plus/minus buttons,located on the steering column shiftlever, to select the desired range ofgears for current driving conditions.See Manual Mode on page 9‑48.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haulmode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑49.

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels for extratraction.

Transfer Case Buttons

The vehicle will have one of thesethree styles of transfer casecontrols. Use these controls to shiftinto and out of the differentFour-Wheel Drive modes.

Manual Transfer Case

This transfer case shift lever is onthe floor to the right of the driver.

Electronic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is locatednext to the steering column.


In Brief 1-23

Automatic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is locatednext to the steering column.

Each transfer case design offersdifferent drive options. The listbelow described the different driveoptions that may be available.

2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable.

4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use theFour-Wheel-Drive High positionwhen extra traction is needed, suchas on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations.

N (Neutral): Shift the transfer caseto Neutral only when towing thevehicle. See Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10‑97 or TrailerTowing on page 9‑91.

4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): Thissetting sends maximum power to allfour wheels. You might chooseFour-Wheel-Drive Low if you aredriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, deep snow, and while climbingor descending steep hills.

See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑52.


1-24 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Press to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,

or WMA song. If information isavailable during XM, CD, MP3,or WMA playback, the song titleinformation displays on the top lineof the display and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑2.

For vehicles with a Rear SeatEntertainment System (RSE) andRear Seat Audio System (RSA), seeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑36 and RearSeat Audio (RSA) System onpage 7‑45 for more information.


In Brief 1-25

Storing Radio Stations

A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAV togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

For more information, see “StoringRadio Stations” in AM-FM Radio onpage 7‑7 .

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theradio with CD, DVD, and USB Port:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpressO, to turn the radio on.

2. Press H to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, and YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year).

3. Press the softkey located underany one of the labels to bechanged.

4. To increase or decrease the timeor date, turn f clockwise orcounter‐clockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicle's specificaudio system, see Clock onpage 5‑8 .

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See “XM Satellite Radio Service”under Satellite Radio on page 7‑9.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput located on the radio faceplateand a USB port located in the centerconsole or on the dashboard.External devices such as an iPod®,laptop computer, MP3 player, CDchanger, or USB storage device.can be connected to the auxiliaryport using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) inputcable or the USB port depending onthe audio system.

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack”and “Using the USB Port” inAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑31.


1-26 In Brief

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth‐enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see Bluetoothon page 7‑47.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w /x : Press to change favoriteradio stations, select tracks on aCD/DVD, or to navigate tracks orfolders on an iPod® or USB device.

b g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e − e : Press to increase ordecrease volume.

c : Press to reject an incomingcall, or to end a call.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track or chapterwhile sourced to the CD or DVDslot, or to select tracks and folderson an iPod® or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑3.


In Brief 1-27

Navigation SystemThe vehicle's navigation system(if equipped) provides detailed mapsof most major freeways and roadsthroughout the United States andCanada. After a destination hasbeen set, the system providesturn-by-turn instructions for reachingthe destination. In addition, thesystem can help locate a variety ofpoints of interest (POI), such asbanks, airports, restaurants,and more.

See the Navigation System manualfor more information.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located at thebottom of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems and enablesaccess to the personalization menu.

The DIC buttons are located on theinstrument panel, next to thesteering wheel.

Some vehicles do not have thebuttons shown, however some ofthe menus can be viewed by usingthe trip odometer reset stem.

3 : Press this button to displaythe odometer, trip odometer, fuelrange, average economy, fuel used,timer, transmission temperature, andinstantaneous economy and ActiveFuel Mangement™ indicator. Thecompass and outside airtemperature will also be shown in

the display. The temperature will beshown in °C or °F depending on theunits selected.

T : Press this button to displaythe oil life, units, tire pressurereadings for vehicles with the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS),trailer brake gain and outputinformation for vehicles with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, engine hours,compass zone setting, and compassrecalibration.

U : Press this button to customizethe feature settings on the vehicle.See Vehicle Personalization (withDIC Buttons) on page 5‑50 formore information.

V : Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑32.


1-28 In Brief

Vehicle Customization

Some vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons next to the steering wheel.These features include:. Language. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback. Lighting. Chime Volume. Memory Features

See Vehicle Personalization (withDIC Buttons) on page 5‑50.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

T : Press to turn the system onor off. The indicator light is on whencruise control is on and turns offwhen cruise control is off.

+ RES : Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET − : Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑71.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The rear vision camera displays aview of the area behind the vehiclewhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). This is displayed onthe inside rearview mirror or thenavigation screen, if equipped.

To clean the camera lens, located inthe bezel for the tailgate handle,rinse it with water and wipe it with asoft cloth.

For more information, see RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑76.


In Brief 1-29

Ultrasonic Parking AssistUltrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. URPA comeson automatically when the shift leveris moved into R (Reverse) andoperates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph). URPA uses audio beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

The system can be disabled bypressing the rear park aid disablebutton located next to the radio.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑74 for more information.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets locatedbelow the climate control system,or may have one accessory poweroutlet and one cigarette lighter. Thecigarette lighter is designed to fitonly in the receptacle closest to thedriver.

There may be another accessorypower outlet in the rear cargo area.If the vehicle has a floor console,there is an accessory power outletinside the storage bin and one onthe rear of the floor console.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. Continuing to usepower outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑10.

Universal Remote System

The Universal Remote Systemallows for garage door openers,security systems, and homeautomation devices to beprogrammed to work with thesebuttons in the vehicle.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑58.


1-30 In Brief

Sunroof

Extended Cab

The sunroof switch is located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the rear of the switchto vent the sunroof.

Open: From the vent position,press and hold the rear of the switchto open the sunroof.

Close: Press and hold the front ofthe switch to close the sunroof.

The sunroof also has a rollersunshade that can be used to blockthe rays of the sun. To open thesunshade, press and unlatch it, androll it back. To close, pull it forwardand latch it into the closed position.

Crew Cab

There are two sunroof switcheslocated in the overhead consoleabove the rearview mirror.

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of the passenger sideswitch to vent the sunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: Toopen the sunroof, press and holdthe rear of the driver side switchuntil the sunroof reaches thedesired position. Press and hold thefront of the driver side switch toclose it.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear of thedriver side switch until the sunroofreaches the desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front of thedriver side switch. Press the switchagain to stop it.

The sunroof also has a sunshadethat you can pull forward to blockthe rays of the sun. The sunshademust be opened and closedmanually.

See Sunroof (Extended Cab) onpage 2‑20 or Sunroof (Crew Cab)on page 2‑21.


In Brief 1-31

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemIf equipped, the vehicle has atraction control system that limitswheel spin and the StabiliTraksystem that assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. Both systemsturn on automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release 5 on the instrument

panel. F illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages onpage 5‑46.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and hold5 until F illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages onpage 5‑46.

. Press and release 5 again toturn on both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑68.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate the

tires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑62.


1-32 In Brief

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand, on most vehicles, displays aDIC message when it is necessaryto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

To reset the Engine Oil Life Systemon most vehicles:

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. If the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, thevehicle must be in P (Park) toaccess this display.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC, or the tripodometer reset stem if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

On all vehicles, the Engine Oil LifeSystem can be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. If the display shows100%, the system is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑84. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑82.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.


In Brief 1-33

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782(1‐800‐462-8782)

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new GMC, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Thisprogram provides technically trainedadvisors who are available 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year, to giveminor repair information or maketowing arrangements.

For more information see RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑7.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press the OnStarbutton and the current GPS locationwill be sent to an OnStar Advisorwho will assess your problem,contact Roadside Assistance, andrelay your exact location to get thehelp you need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.)or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide a wide range ofsafety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar advisor to verify youraccount information and to answerquestions.


1-34 In Brief

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are available onall vehicles. For more informationsee the OnStar Owner's Guide orvisit www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080, or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar'sservice. Service involving locationinformation about your vehicle can’twork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStar

hardware. The vehicle has to have aworking electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and your vehicle is in goodworking order and in compliancewith all government regulations.If you try to add, connect, or modifyany equipment or software in yourvehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of your vehicle,damage to important parts of yourvehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.


In Brief 1-35

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly. Push theQbutton and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light appears), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.Push theQ button to confirm thatthe OnStar equipment is active.


1-36 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsRear Doors(Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

RoofSunroof (Extended Cab) . . . . . 2-20Sunroof (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . 2-21


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of the vehicle,call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑7.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.



If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

With Remote Start (withoutRemote Start Similar)

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press/to start the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization (with DIC Buttons)on page 5‑50 for additionalinformation.

Pressing Q arms the contenttheft‐deterrent system. SeeAnti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.



K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization (with DIC Buttons)on page 5‑50. If enabled throughthe DIC, the exterior lights may turnon. See “Approach Lighting” underVehicle Personalization (with DICButtons) on page 5‑50.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft‐deterrentsystem. See Anti-Theft AlarmSystem on page 2‑11.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/RUN orL is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

The vehicle comes with twotransmitters. Each transmitter willhave a number on it: "1" or "2."These numbers correspond to thedriver of the vehicle. For example,the memory seat position fordriver 1 will be recalled when usingthe transmitter labeled "1",if enabled through the DIC. See“Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals”under Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3 and VehiclePersonalization (with DIC Buttons)on page 5‑50 for more information.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersprogrammed to it. See your dealerfor transmitter programming.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.



To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool into

the notch located along theparting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have a remotestarting feature. This feature allowsyou to start the engine from outsideof the vehicle. It may also start upthe vehicle's heating or airconditioning systems and rearwindow defogger. Normal operationof the system will return after thekey is turned to the ON/RUNposition.

If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, the climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperatures. If thevehicle does not have an automaticclimate control system, the systemwill turn on at the setting the vehiclewas set to when the vehicle waslast turned off.

During a remote start, if the vehiclehas an automatic climate controlsystem and heated seats, theheated seats will turn on duringcolder outside temperatures and willshut off when the key is turned toON/RUN. If the vehicle does nothave an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start,manually turn the heated seats onand off. See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9 for additional information.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.



If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However, therange may be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2for additional information.

/ (Remote Start): This button willbe on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release thetransmitter's lock button. Thevehicle's doors will lock.Immediately press and hold thetransmitter's remote start buttonuntil the turn signal lamps flash.If you cannot see the vehicle'slamps, press and hold the

remote start button for two tofour seconds. Pressing theremote start button again afterthe vehicle has started will turnthe engine off.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the vehicle isrunning.

If the vehicle is left running, itwill automatically shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension has been done.

3. If it is the first remote start sincethe vehicle has been driven,repeat these steps, while theengine is still running, to extendthe engine running time by10 minutes. Remote start can beextended one time.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

To manually shut off a remote start,do any of the following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press the remotestart button until the parkinglamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

The vehicle can be remote startedtwo separate times between drivingsequences. The engine will run for10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine runtime by another 10 minutes withinthe first 10 minute remote start timeframe, and before the engine stops.

For example, if the lock button andthen the remote start buttons arepressed again after the vehicle hasbeen running for 5 minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing theengine to run for 15 minutes.



The additional 10 minutes areconsidered a second remote vehiclestart.

Once two remote starts, or a singleremote start with one time extensionhas been done, the vehicle must bestarted with the key. After the key isremoved from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if the key is in the ignition,the hood is not closed, or if there isan emission control systemmalfunction and the check enginelight comes on.

Also, the engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if the coolanttemperature gets too high or if theoil pressure gets low.

Remote Start Ready

If the vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature.

See your dealer to add themanufacturer's remote vehicle startfeature to the vehicle.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock your vehicle.

From the outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.



From the inside, use the power doorlocks or manual door locks. To lockor unlock the door with the manuallocks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.

Power Door LocksWith power door locks, the switcheson the front doors can be used tolock and unlock the vehicle.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key fromthe ignition and press to lock thedoors.

Delayed LockingThe vehicle may have the delayedlocking feature. When locking thedoors with the power lock switchand a door is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last dooris closed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmedusing the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “Delay DoorLock” under Vehicle Personalization(with DIC Buttons) on page 5‑50.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization (with DICButtons) on page 5‑50 for moreinformation on DIC programming.

Lockout ProtectionIf the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driverdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.



Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.

Doors

Rear Doors(Extended Cab)

To open a rear access door from theoutside, first open the front door.Then, use the handle located on thefront edge of the rear access door toopen it.

The rear access door must beclosed before the front door canclose.

To open a rear access door from theinside, first open the front door.Then, use the handle located on theinside of the rear access doorto open.



Tailgate

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to rideon the tailgate, even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.People riding on the tailgatecan easily lose their balance andfall in response to vehiclemaneuvers. Falling from a movingvehicle may result in seriousinjuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate. Besure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a safety beltproperly.

On vehicles with a lock on thetailgate, use the key to lock orunlock the tailgate.

Open the tailgate by lifting up on itshandle while pulling the tailgatetoward you.

To shut the tailgate, firmly push itupward until it latches.

After you put the tailgate back up,pull it back towards you to be sure itlatches securely.

Tailgate Removal

The tailgate can be removed toallow for different loading situations.Someone may need to assist withremoval to avoid damage to thevehicle.

On vehicles with a Rear VisionCamera, it must be disconnectedbefore removing the tailgate. SeeRear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑76 for more information.

To remove the tailgate:

1. Raise the tailgate slightly andrelease both retaining cableclips. To release the retainingcable clips, lift the cable so itpoints straight out. Lift the clipover the bolt, and push the cableforward then rotate down.



2. With the tailgate about halfwayopen, lift the right edge of thetailgate from the lower pivot.

On vehicles with the tailgateassist feature, raise the tailgatenearly all the way to the closedposition prior to removing theleft edge.

3. Move the tailgate to the right torelease the left edge.

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe tailgate. Make sure the tailgateis secure.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle may have a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

This is the security light.

To arm the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.The security light should flash.

If the delayed locking feature isactive, the alarm will not beactivated until all doors areclosed and the security lightgoes off.

3. Close all doors. The securitylight will stop flashing and go offafter approximately 30 seconds.The system is armed when thesecurity light goes off.

If a locked driver door is openedwithout using the RKE transmitter, a10 second pre-alarm will occur. Thehorn will chirp and the lights willflash. If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to START or thedoor is not unlocked by pressing theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter during the 10 secondpre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Thevehicle's headlamps will flash andthe horn will sound for about30 seconds, then will turn off to savethe battery power.



The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe key or the manual door lock.It activates only if you use thepower door lock switch or the RKEtransmitter. The vehicle can bestarted with the correct key if thealarm is set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. If you do not want to activate the

theft-deterrent system, thevehicle should be locked withthe door key after the doors areclosed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter.

If the alarm is set off, press unlockon the RKE transmitter or place thekey in the ignition and turn it toSTART.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. Lower the driver window andopen the driver door.

2. Press lock on the RKEtransmitter.

3. Close the door and wait for thesecurity light to go out.

4. Reach in through the window,unlock the door with the manualdoor lock, and open the door.This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould but the headlamps flash,check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replacethe fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑46.

If the alarm does not sound or theheadlamps do not flash, see yourdealer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY orSTART from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.



The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key® III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, there may be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑46. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.

If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the PASS-Key® III+ tohave a new key made. In anemergency, contact RoadsideAssistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must seeyour dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to havekeys made and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key® III+ to get anew key blank cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If theengine will not start, see yourdealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds of turning theignition to the LOCK/OFFposition in Step 3.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.



If you lose or damage yourPASS-Key® III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual MirrorsAdjust the outside mirrors for aclearer view.

Using hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Trailer-Tow Mirrors

If the vehicle has towing mirrors,they can be adjusted for a clearerview of the objects behind you.



Manually pull out the mirror head toextend it for better visibility whentowing a trailer.

The lower portion of the mirror isconvex. A convex mirror's surface iscurved to see more from the driverseat. The convex mirror can beadjusted manually to the driverpreferred position for better vision.

The mirror may have a turn signalarrow that flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Power Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave controls located on thedriver door.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Adjust the outside mirror so thatthe side of the vehicle and thearea behind are seen.

4. Press either (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

Folding Mirrors

Vehicles with outside powerfoldaway mirrors have controlslocated on the driver door.



Power Foldaway

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors

Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors will not stay in the

unfolded position.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfoldaway mirrors. This sound isnormal after a manual foldingoperation.

Manual Foldaway

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

Automatic Dimming

If equipped with an automaticdimming mirror. The driver outsidemirror adjusts for the glare of theheadlamps behind you. SeeAutomatic Dimming Rearview Mirroron page 2‑17.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle may also have a turnsignal indicator on the mirror. Anarrow on the mirror flashes in thedirection of the turn or lane change.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors. If thevehicle has a towing mirror, only theupper glass of the mirror is heated.The lower convex part of the towingmirror is not heated.

Depending on the vehicle's features,see “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems (with AirConditioning) on page 8‑1 orClimate Control Systems (withHeater Only) on page 8‑4 or DualAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8‑5 for more information.



Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the passenger and/ordriver mirror tilts to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This feature lets thedriver view the curb when parallelparking. The mirror(s) return to theoriginal position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), or theignition is turned off or toOFF/LOCK.

Turn this feature on or off throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization (withDIC Buttons) on page 5‑50 formore information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust manual rearview mirrors tosee clearly behind the vehicle. Holdthe mirror in the center to adjust it.To reduce headlamp glare duringnight use, pull the tab forward. Pushthe tab back for daytime use.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑76for more information.

If the vehicle has RVC, the Obutton for turning the dimmingfeature on or off will not beavailable.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar system. See your dealer formore information about OnStar andhow to subscribe to it. See theOnStar Owner Guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Manual WindowsTurn the hand crank on each doorto manually raise or lower themanual windows.

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.



Crew Cab Shown

If the vehicle has power windows,controls are located on each door.

The driver door has a switch for thepassenger and rear windows aswell. The power windows will workwhen the ignition has been turned toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN orwhen Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑35.

Push the switch down to lower thewindow, and pull up the front of theswitch to raise the window.

Express-down Windows

Vehicles with the express-downfeature allow the driver and frontpassenger windows to be loweredwithout holding the switch. Push theswitch down to the second detent,then release, to activate theexpress-down mode. Theexpress-down mode can becanceled at any time by pulling upon the front of the switch. To openthe window partway, push the switchdown to the first detent until thewindow is at the desired position.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): If a crewcab or extended cab vehicle haspower windows, the driver doorpower window switch has a lockoutfeature. This feature prevents therear windows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position. Press theswitch to engage or disengage thelockout feature. An indicator light onthe switch will come on when thelockout feature is engaged, and willgo off when disengaged.

Rear Windows

Power Sliding Rear Window

On vehicles with a power slidingrear window, the switch is located inthe overhead console.

The power sliding rear windowworks when the ignition has beenturned to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑35 for more information.



The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually.

T : Push to open the window.

S : Pull to close the window.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to extend along therod or to pivot to the side window.

Roof

Sunroof (Extended Cab)

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof switch is located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror.

The sunroof only operates when theignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN or the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the rear of the switchto vent the sunroof. To close thesunroof, press and hold the front ofthe switch.

Open: From the vent position, thesunroof can be fully opened eithermanually or by using theexpress-open feature. To openmanually, press the rear of theswitch to the first detent and holduntil the sunroof has reached thedesired position. To open usingexpress-open, press the rear of theswitch to the second detent andrelease. The sunroof will move tothe full open position. To stop thesunroof partway, press the switch asecond time.



Close: From the vent, or openposition, press and hold the front ofthe switch to close the sunroof.

The sunroof also has a rollersunshade that can be used to blockthe rays of the sun. The rollersunshade can be manually operatedwith the sunroof in an open orclosed position. To open thesunshade, press and unlatch it, androll it back. To close, pull it forwardand latch it into the closed position.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise, or plugging thewater drainage system. Periodicallyopen the sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.

Sunroof (Crew Cab)

On vehicles with a sunroof, thereare two sunroof switches located inthe overhead console above therearview mirror.

The sunroof only operates when theignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN or the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑35 RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) for moreinformation.



Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of the passenger sideswitch to vent the sunroof. To closethe sunroof, press and hold the frontof the passenger side switch.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: Toopen the sunroof, press the rear ofthe driver side switch to the firstdetent and hold until the sunroofreaches the desired position. Toclose the sunroof, press the front ofthe driver side switch to the firstdetent and hold until the sunroofreaches the desired position.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, press therear of the driver side switch to thesecond detent and release. Thesunroof will open automatically.To stop the sunroof partway, pressthe switch a second time. Toexpress-close the sunroof, press thefront of the driver side switch to thesecond detent and release. Thesunroof will close automatically. Tostop the sunroof partway, press theswitch a second time.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object isin the path of the sunroof while it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature willdetect the object and stop thesunroof.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise, or plugging thewater drainage system. Periodicallyopen the sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear SeatsRear Seats (Extended CabFull Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear Seats (All Split Benchand Hybrid Full Bench) . . . . . 3-11

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Lap Belt (Crew andExtended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-26Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-26Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-30When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-36Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-44

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-46Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-51Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-53Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-64

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push therestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.

The rear seat has headrests thatcan be adjusted up and down.



Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

If the vehicle has a manual seat, itcan be moved forward or rearward.

1. Lift the bar under the front edgeof the seat cushion to unlockthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with your bodyto be sure the seat is locked inplace.

Center SeatYour vehicle may have a frontcenter seat. The seatback doublesas an armrest and cupholder/storage area for the driver andpassenger when the center seat is

not used. Do not use it as a seatingposition when the seatback isfolded down.

Power Seat Adjustment

Driver Seat with Power SeatControl, Power Recline,

and Power Lumbar Shown

For vehicles with power seats, thecontrols are on the outboard side ofthe seats.

Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.



The vehicle may have additionalfeatures to adjust the power seat:. Raise or lower the front part of

the seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the rear part ofthe seat cushion by moving therear of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

On seats with power recliningseatbacks, the control is next to thepower seat control on the outboardside of the seats. See “PowerReclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑7.

Memory Seat, Mirrors, andPedals

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driverdoor are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seat,outside mirrors, and the adjustablethrottle and brake pedals, if thevehicle has this feature.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat andseatback recliner, both outsidemirrors, and the throttle andbrake pedals, if available.

See Power Mirrors onpage 2‑15 and AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9‑33 for more information.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottles and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall the memory positions,press and release “1” or “2.” Thevehicle must be in P (Park). A singlebeep will sound. The seat, outsidemirrors, and adjustable throttle andbrake pedals will move to theposition previously stored for theidentified driver.



Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat, outside mirrors, andpedals, if available, to storedpositions when entering the vehicle.

To activate memory remote recall,unlock the driver door with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. The driver seat, outsidemirrors, and adjustable pedals,if available, will move to the memoryposition associated with thetransmitter used to unlock thevehicle.

The automatic recall feature can beturned on or off using the vehiclepersonalization menu. See “MemorySeat Recall” under VehiclePersonalization (with DIC Buttons)on page 5‑50 for more information.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, memorybuttons, or power mirror buttons,or the adjustable pedal switch.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or the adjustable pedalswhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by pressingthe appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

The easy exit driver seat featurecan move the seat rearward to allowextra room to exit the vehicle.

B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Pressto recall the easy exit seat position.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

If the easy exit seat feature isprogrammed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, automaticseat movement occurs when theignition key is removed.

A single beep sounds. The driverseat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in). To move the seat backfarther, press the easy exit seatbutton again until the seat is all theway back.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

See “Easy Exit Recall” and “EasyExit Setup” under VehiclePersonalization (with DIC Buttons)on page 5‑50 for more information.



Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

On vehicles with this feature thecontrol is located on the outboardside of the seat.

Increase or decrease lumbarsupport by turning the knob forwardor rearward.

Power Lumbar

On seats with power lumbar, thecontrols used to operate this featureare located on the outboard side ofthe seats.

This vehicle may have two‐waylumbar.. To increase lumbar support,

press and hold the top of thecontrol.

. To decrease lumbar support,press and hold the bottom of thecontrol.

The vehicle may have four‐waylumbar.. To increase lumbar support,

press and hold the front of thecontrol.

. To decrease lumbar support,press and hold the rear of thecontrol.

. To raise the height of the lumbarsupport, press and hold the topof the control.

. To lower the height of the lumbarsupport, press and hold thebottom of the control.

Release the control when the lowerseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction which allows seat settingsto be saved and recalled. SeePower Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3 for more information.



Keep in mind that as your seatingposition changes, as it may duringlong trips, so should the position ofyour lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up,your safety belts cannot do theirjob when you are reclinedlike this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob. In a crash, you could go intoit, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash the belt could goup over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

On seats with manual recliningseatbacks, the lever used to operatethem is located on the outboard sideof the seat(s).

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.


To return the seatback to an uprightposition, do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have power recliningseatbacks, the control used torecline them is located on theoutboard side of the seat behind thepower seat control.. To recline the seatback, tilt the

top of the control rearward.. To bring the seatback forward,

tilt the top of the control forward.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Seatback LatchesThe front seatbacks tilt forward toallow access to the rear of the cab.

To tilt the seatback forward, lift thelever located on the outboard sideof the seat cushion.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition, push the seatbackrearward until it latches. Afterreturning the seatback to its uprightposition, push and pull on theseatback to make sure it is locked.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

On vehicles with heated front seats,the buttons are located on the frontdoors, near the door handle.

I (Heated Seatback): Press toturn on the heated seatback.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to turn on the heated seatand seatback.



Repeatedly press and release thebutton to cycle through thetemperature settings: high, medium,and low, and to turn the heat to theseat off. Indicator lights next to thebutton show the selected setting:three for high, two for medium, andone for low.

The heated seats will be canceled10 seconds after the ignition isturned off. To use the heated seatfeature after restarting the vehicle,press the heated seat or seatbackbutton again.

Rear Seats

Rear Seats (ExtendedCab Full Bench)

Folding the Rear Seat

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seat up:

1. Pull up on the front of the seatcushion while pulling down onthe release strap, located underthe seat cushion.

2. Pull the seat cushion up until itlatches with the seatback.

3. After latching the seat cushionup, pull forward on it to makesure it is locked.



To fold the seat down:

1. Push the seat cushion rearwardwhile pulling the release strap,located under the seat cushion.Pull the seat cushion down untilit latches.

2. After latching the seat cushion,pull up on it to make sure it islocked.

Make sure the safety belts arenot twisted or caught in the seatcushion.

Rear Seats (All SplitBench and Hybrid FullBench)

Folding Rear Seat

On a vehicle with a second row60/40 split seat, either side of therear seat may be folded for addedcargo space.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

Make sure that nothing is onthe seat.

To fold the seat, slowly pull the seatcushion up.

To return the seat to the normalseating position, slowly pull the seatcushion down.

Make sure the safety belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatcushion.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. You andyour passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and checkthat your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{ WARNING

People riding on the tailgate(if equipped) can easily lose theirbalance and fall even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.Falling from a moving vehicle mayresult in serious injuries or death.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑19 for additionalinformation.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash, youdo not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!



Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...



or the instrument panel...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be—whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead of

them. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash— evenone that is not your fault— youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home. Andthe greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur atspeeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.



How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding in thevehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑47 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑49. Followthose rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, this

applies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.



Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lap beltand apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.




A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.




A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltIf the vehicle is a regular cab, thenall seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt. If thevehicle is a crew or extended cab,then all seating positions in thevehicle have a lap-shoulder beltexcept for the center frontpassenger position (if equipped),which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt(Crew and Extended Cab) onpage 3‑25 for more information.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let the

belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑39for more information.



If the belt stops before it reachesthe buckle, when using thelap-shoulder belt in a rear centerseating position of a crew-cab,tilt the latch plate and keeppulling the safety belt until it canbe buckled.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑26.

If the latch plate will not go fullyinto the buckle, check if thecorrect buckle is being used.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑15.

Regular and Crew Cab

To move the adjuster down for theregular and crew cabs, squeeze thebuttons (A) on the sides of theheight adjuster and move the heightadjuster to the desired position.



Extended Cab

On the extended cab, push down onthe release button (A) and move theheight adjuster to the desiredposition.

You can move the adjuster up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After you move the adjuster towhere you want it, try to move itdown, without squeezing the buttonsfor the regular and crew cabs,or without pushing the releasebutton for extended cabs, to makesure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if yourvehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 3‑27.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.



Here is how to install a comfortguide to the shoulder belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.



4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide onto the storage clip.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Lap Belt (Crew andExtended Cab)This section is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑20.

Your vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit in thecenter front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has noretractor.



To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position, and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 3‑26.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in a



crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑19 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care onpage 3‑27.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑20.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.

The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and the personseated directly behind the rightfront passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat‐mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑32.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑47 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑49.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑20 formore information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver airbag is in the middle ofthe steering wheel.

The right front passenger airbag isin the instrument panel on thepassenger's side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has seat‐mounted sideimpact airbags for the driver andright front passenger, they are in theside of the seatbacks closest tothe door.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If the vehicle has roof-rail airbagsfor the driver, right front passenger,and second row outboardpassengers, they are in the ceilingabove the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) of your vehicle is 3 855 kg(8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle hassingle stage airbags. If the GVWR isbelow 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then thevehicle has dual stage airbags.Vehicles with a full bench seat areequipped with single state airbags.You can find the GVWR on thecertification label on the rear edgeof the driver's door. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23 for moreinformation.

The vehicle may have dual‐stagefrontal airbags. Dual-stage airbagsadjust the restraint according tocrash severity. The vehicle haselectronic frontal sensors, whichhelp the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impactand a more severe frontal impact.For moderate frontal impacts,dual-stage airbags inflate at a level



less than full deployment. For moresevere frontal impacts, fulldeployment occurs.

Vehicles with dual stage airbagsalso have seat position sensorswhich enable the sensing system tomonitor the position of the driverseat (all models), and on crew caband extended cab models the rightfront passenger seat on light dutymodels only. The seat positionsensor provides information that isused to determine if the airbagsshould deploy at a reduced level orat full deployment.

The vehicle may or may not haveseat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3‑28. Seat‐mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes. In addition,these roof-rail airbags are intendedto inflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat‐mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is above

the system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are notintended to inflate in rear impacts.A seat‐mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struck,or if the sensing system predictsthat the vehicle is about to roll over,or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In a

rollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.



How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk of

full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑32 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑33.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathing

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle may have a feature thatmay automatically unlock the doors,turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

moderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possibly

other parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑17 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑17.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Airbag On-Off SwitchIf one of the switches pictured in thefollowing illustrations is located inthe glove box, the vehicle has anairbag on-off switch that you canuse to manually turn on or off theright front passenger airbag.

United States

Canada and Mexico

If the vehicle does not have anairbag off switch, it may have apassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑39.

This switch should only be turned tothe off position if the person in theright front passenger position is amember of a passenger risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 yearold) must ride in the front seatbecause:. My vehicle has no rear seat;. My vehicle has a rear seat too

small to accommodate arear-facing infant seat; or

. The infant has a medicalcondition which, according to theinfant's physician, makes itnecessary for the infant to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.



Child age 1 to 12. A childage 1 to 12 must ride in the frontseat because:. My vehicle has no rear seat;. Although children ages 1 to 12

ride in the rear seat(s) wheneverpossible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the frontbecause no space is available inthe rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

. The child has a medicalcondition which, according to thechild's physician, makes itnecessary for the child to ride inthe front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor thechild's condition.

Medical Condition. A passengerhas a medical condition which,according to his or her physician:. Causes the passenger airbag to

pose a special risk for thepassenger; and

. Makes the potential harm fromthe passenger airbag in a crashgreater than the potential harmfrom turning off the airbag andallowing the passenger, even ifbelted, to hit the dashboard orwindshield in a crash.

{ WARNING

If the right front passenger'sairbag is turned off for a personwho is not in a risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment, that person will nothave the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.Do not turn off the passenger'sairbag unless the person sittingthere is in a risk group.



United States

Canada and Mexico

To turn off the right front passengerairbag, insert the ignition key intothe switch, push in, and move theswitch to the off position.

The word OFF or the off symbol willcome on in the passenger airbagstatus indicator located in theoverhead console to let you knowthat the right front passenger airbagis off, after the system check iscompleted. The airbag off light willcome on and stay on to let youknow that the right front passenger'sairbag is off. See Airbag On-OffLight on page 5‑21.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. Forexample, the right frontpassenger airbag could inflateeven though the airbag on-offswitch is turned off.

To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑20 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



United States

Canada and Mexico

To turn the right front passengerairbag on again, insert the ignitionkey into the switch, push in, andmove the switch to the on position.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is now enabled (may inflate).See Airbag On-Off Light onpage 5‑21 for more information.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position,unless there is an airbag off switchlocated in the glove box. If there isan airbag off switch, the vehicledoes not have a passenger sensingsystem. See Airbag On-Off Switchon page 3‑36 for more information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicleis started.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start to start thevehicle from a distance, if equipped,you may not see the system check.



When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑23.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags(if equipped), and the roof-railairbags (if equipped) are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat andsafety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right frontpassenger frontal airbag should beenabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑23.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in your vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑20 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑64 orSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) onpage 3‑66 or Securing ChildRestraints (Center Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑75.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,



use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the belt ispulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag off forsome adult size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system

operates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑44 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.



Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑14.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange your vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, front

sensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle may havea passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger'sposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passenger'sseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passenger



airbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑39.

If you have any questions aboutthis, you should contactCustomer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑73 for additionalimportant information.

Q: What if I added a snow plow?Will it keep the airbags fromworking properly?

A: We have designed our airbagsystems to work properly undera wide range of conditions,including snow plowing withvehicles that have the optionalSnow Plow Prep Package(RPO VYU). But do not changeor defeat the snow plow's“tripping mechanism.” If you do,it can damage your snow plowand your vehicle, and it maycause an airbag inflation.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑20 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑33. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑20 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑20 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑20.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑55 formore information. Children can be



endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

If a child restraint is secured in theright front passenger seat, and thevehicle has a switch in the glovebox to manually turn off the rightfront passenger airbag, see AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑36 andSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑64 orSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) on page 3‑66or Securing Child Restraints (CenterFront Seat Position) on page 3‑75for more information, includingimportant safety information.




{ WARNING


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem or airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.



Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.


Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Regular Cab — Two-PassengerFront Seat

Regular Cab — Three-PassengerFront Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

Do not install a child restraint in thecenter front seat position. SeeSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑64 orSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) on page 3‑66or Securing Child Restraints (CenterFront Seat Position) on page 3‑75for more information.

Crew and Extended Cab Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

For crew and extended cab models,the rear outboard seating positionshave exposed metal lower anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.



For regular cab models, there is ananchor symbol on the covers toassist you in locating the top tetheranchors.

Regular Cab

Do not install a child restraint in thecenter seat position. See SecuringChild Restraints (Rear SeatPosition) on page 3‑64 or Securing

Child Restraints (Right Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑75 or SecuringChild Restraints (Center Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑75 for moreinformation.

For regular cab models, the toptether anchors are located undercovers on the back panel behind thepassenger seat. Remove the trimplug to access the anchor. Be sureto use an anchor located on thesame side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Crew Cab Shown, Extended CabSimilar

For crew and extended cab models,the top tether anchors are the loopslocated near the top of the seatbackfor each rear seating position.These loops will be used to routethe top tether through, as well as, tosecure the top tether in the vehicle.Be sure to use an anchor (loop)located on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.



Be sure to read the instructionsfollowing to properly install a childrestraint using these loops.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑53 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor,except for the center top tetheranchors in the crew and extendedcabs. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor orattachment to come loose or evenbreak during a crash. A child orothers could be injured. To reducethe risk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

Regular Cab Models

1. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if your vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

1.1. Pull the passengerseatback forward by pullingthe recliner handle upwardto access the top tetheranchor. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3‑7for additional information.

1.2. Find the top tether anchor.

1.3. Remove the cover toexpose the anchor.

1.4. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.



If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

2. See Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) onpage 3‑64 or Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑66 orSecuring Child Restraints(Center Front Seat Position) onpage 3‑75 for instructions oninstalling the child restraint usingthe safety belts.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Crew and Extended Cab Models

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.



2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor (loop), if your vehicle hasone. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

Example — Rear Driver SidePosition

Example — Rear Driver SidePosition

2.1. When using a child restraintwith a top tether in the reardriver side position:

A. Raise the headrestor head restraint.

B. Route the toptether (B) betweenthe headrest or headrestraint posts,through the loop (A),behind the inboardheadrest or head

restraint post, andunder the centershoulder belt (C).

C. Attach the toptether (B) tothe top tetheranchor (loop) (D) atthe center rearseating position.

2.2. When using a child restraintwith a top tether in the rearcenter position:

A. Route the toptether (B) throughthe center loop (D),and behind theinboard passengerside headrest orhead restraint post.

B. Attach the toptether (B) to the toptether anchor (loop)at the rearpassenger sideseating position.



2.3. When using a child restraintwith a top tether in the rearpassenger position:

A. Raise the headrestor head restraint.

B. Route the toptether (B) betweenthe headrest or headrestraint posts,through the loop onthe passenger sideand behind theinboard headrest orhead restraint post.

C. Attach the toptether (B) tothe top tetheranchor (loop) (D) atthe center rearseating position.

2.4. Tighten the top tetherwhen and as the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions say.

When the top tether istightened, the anchor (loop)may bend. This is normaland will not damage thevehicle.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure itis securely held in place.To check, grasp the childrestraint at the LATCH path andattempt to move it side‐to‐sideand back‐and‐forth. Thereshould be no more than 2.5 cm(1 in) of movement for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑55 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑53.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

For crew cab second rowseatings positions, tilt the latchplate to adjust the belt if needed.




Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)

With Passenger SensingSystem

This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑53.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑39 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑23 for more informationon this, including important safetyinformation.


{ WARNING


The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, no system is

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughit is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑39 for additionalinformation.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑55 fortop tether anchor locations.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑23.






Position the release button sothat the safety belt could bequickly unbuckled if necessary.






7. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑55 for more information.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the vehicle is equipped with apassenger sensing system, andwhen the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑39 for moreinformation.


With Airbag Off Switch


There may be a switch in the glovebox that you can use to turn off theright front passenger frontal airbag.See Airbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑36 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front unless airbag is off.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the airbag switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

{ WARNING






If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑55 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.




If you have no other choice butto install a rear-facing childrestraint in this seat, make surethe airbag is off once the childrestraint has been installed.

When the airbag off switch hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the airbag off lightshould light and stay lit whenyou start the vehicle. See AirbagOn-Off Light on page 5‑21.




Position the release button sothat the safety belt could bequickly unbuckled if necessary.






7. If your vehicle does not have arear seat and your child restrainthas a top tether, follow the childrestraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑55.





If you turned the airbag off with theswitch, turn on the right frontpassenger airbag when you removethe child restraint from the vehicleunless the person who will be sittingthere is a member of a passengerairbag risk group. See AirbagOn-Off Switch on page 3‑36 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only



Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front passengerseat. Here is why:

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger's airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. Always secure arear-facing child restraint in arear seat.


If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑55 fortop tether anchor locations.










Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.






7. If your child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑55 for moreinformation.



Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition)

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel StorageFor vehicles equipped with aninstrument panel storage area, it islocated above the glove box.

Access the storage area bypressing and holding in the driverside of the handle and pull out onthe exposed portion of the handle.

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

CupholdersVehicles with cupholders have themlocated on and behind the centerconsole and in the rear seatarmrest. Pull the loop down on therear seat armrest to access thecupholders.

Pull downward on the cover toaccess the cupholders behind thecenter console.


4-2 Storage

Armrest StorageVehicles with a rear seat armresthave two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down from the rearseatback to access the cupholders.

Center Console StorageVehicles with an upper and lowercenter console storage area havecupholders included.

Pull the lever (A) up to access theupper storage area. Raise the upperstorage bin, then pull the lever (B)up to access the lower storage area.Use the key to lock and unlock thelower storage area.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-19Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-20Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-24MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-29Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-29StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-29Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-30Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-31Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-31Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-31Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-41Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-42Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-44Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-44Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-45Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-45Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-47Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-48Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-50


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization (withDIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-58Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The tilt lever is located on the lowerleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.



Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w /x (Next/Previous): Press toselect preset or favorite radiostations, select tracks on a CD/DVD, or navigate an iPod® or USBdevice.

Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orx to go tothe next or previous radio stationstored as a preset or favorite.

CD/DVD

To select tracks on a CD/DVD:

Press and releasew orx to go tothe next or previous track.

Selecting Tracks on an iPod orUSB Device (Vehicles without aNavigation System)

1. Press and holdw orx whilelistening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew orx toscroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw, or press ¨ toplay the highlighted track.

Navigating Folders on an iPod orUSB Device (Vehicles without aNavigation System):

1. Press and holdw orx whilelistening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdx to go back tothe previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orx toscroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw, or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press andholdx.



Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Main Audio Screen(Vehicles with a NavigationSystem)

1. Press and releasew orx toselect the next or previous trackwithin the selected category.

2. Press and holdw orx to movequickly through the tracks.

3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Music Navigator Screen(Vehicles with a NavigationSystem)

1. Press and releasew orx toselect the next or previous trackwithin the selected category.

2. Press and holdw orx to movequickly through the tracks withinthe selected category.

3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth on page 7‑47 and theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation.

c (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio and CD, and forequipped vehicles, the DVD, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold this buttonfor longer than one second toinitiate voice recognition. See “VoiceRecognition” in the NavigationSystem manual for moreinformation.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with or without anavigation system:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.



For vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep isheard, to place the radio intoSCAN mode. A station will playfor five seconds before movingto the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,press ¨ again.

While listening to a CD/DVD, pressand hold ¨ to quickly move forwardthrough the tracks. Release to stopon the desired track.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.

HornTo sound the horn, press the centerpad on the steering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to8,then release. Several wipes, holdthe band on8 longer.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

] (Low Speed): Slowwipes.

? (High Speed): Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑37.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.



Windshield Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle marked with the windshieldwasher symbol at the top of themultifunction lever, to spray washerfluid on the windshield. The wipersclear the window and then eitherstop or return to the preset speed.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer willset the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances, suchas during a long-distance,cross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zone isnot set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays. Or, if the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, press thetrip odometer reset stem untilCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.



2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel button untilthe vehicle heading, forexample, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC. Or, if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem for

two seconds to select the nextavailable variance zone. Repeatthis step until the appropriatevariance zone is displayed.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass. See“Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may be a

strong magnetic field interfering withthe compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CB orcell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone in whichthe vehicle is located. See“Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, or seats duringthe calibration procedure.



2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays. Or, if the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, press thetrip odometer reset stem untilCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration. Or,if the vehicle does not have DICbuttons, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem fortwo seconds to start thecompass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehicle intight circles at less than 8 km/h(5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETEfor a few seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.

Clock

AM-FM Radio and AM‐FMRadio with CD Player

To set the clock:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpress theO button to turn theradio on.

2. Press the H button until the hournumbers begin to flash, thenturn the f knob to increase ordecrease the hour.

3. Press the H button until theminute numbers begin to flash,then turn the f knob to increaseor decrease the minutes.

4. Press the H button until the12HR or 24HR time formatbegins to flash, then turn the fknob to change the time format.

5. Press the H button again untilthe clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayedtime, or wait until the flashingstops after five seconds and thecurrent time displayedautomatically sets.

MP3 Radios with a Single CDor a Single CD and DVD Player

To adjust the time and date:


2. Press the H button to displayHR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year).

3. Press the softkey located underany one of the tabs to changethat setting.



4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:. Press the softkey below the

selected tab.

. Press the ¨ SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD button.

. Turn the f knob clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press the © SEEK button.

. Press thes REV button.

. Turn the f knobcounterclockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or to changethe date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press the H button and then thesoftkey located below theforward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, thedate MM/DD (month and day),and DD/MM (day and month)displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

3. Press the H button again toapply the desired option, or letthe screen time out.

MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CDPlayer

To set the time and date:


2. Press the MENU button andthen the softkey under the H tabto display HR, MIN, MM, DD,YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,and year).

3. Press the softkey located underany one of the tabs to changethat setting.



4. To increase the time or date, doone of the following:. Press the softkey below the

selected tab.

. Press the ¨ SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD button.

. Turn the f knob clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press the © SEEK button.

. Press thes REV button.

. Turn the f knobcounterclockwise.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or to changethe date default setting from month/day to day/month:

1. Press the MENU button andthen the softkey under theH tab.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H,the date MM/DD (month andday), and DD/MM (day andmonth) displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

4. Press the MENU button again toapply the desired option, or letthe screen time out.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have twoaccessory power outlets locatedbelow the climate control system,or may have one accessory poweroutlet and one cigarette lighter. Thecigarette lighter is designed to fitonly in the receptacle closest to thedriver.

There may be another accessorypower outlet in the rear cargo area.If the vehicle has a floor console,there is an accessory power outletinside the storage bin and one onthe rear of the floor console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.



The accessory power outlets arepowered, even when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. Continuing to usepower outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible to the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑119.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterTo use the cigarette lighter, push itin all the way, and let go. When it isready for use, the lighter popsback out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysThe vehicle may have a frontashtray located near the center ofthe instrument panel. Pull on thedoor to open it. The ashtray mayhave a cigarette lighter.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, open thedoor and pull the ashtray bin towardyou. To replace the ashtray, insertthe ashtray bin inside the ashtraydoor and press down until itengages.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Light Duty Premium Shown. Metric, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Similar.



For vehicles with a DURAMAX®

Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®

Diesel Supplement for moreinformation.

For vehicles with a Hybrid, see theHybrid Supplement for moreinformation.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in both kilometers per hour(km/h) and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Engine Hour Meter Display

The Driver Information Center (DIC)can also display the number ofhours the engine has run. To displaythe engine hours, turn the ignitionoff, then press and hold the resetbutton for at least four seconds. Thehour meter displays for up to30 seconds, or until the ignition is

turned on. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑32 formore information.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last setto zero.

Press the reset button, located onthe instrument panel cluster next tothe voltmeter, to toggle between thetrip odometer and the regularodometer. Holding the reset buttonfor approximately one second whilethe trip odometer is displayed willreset it.

To display the odometer readingwith the ignition off, press the resetbutton.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑32 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). For a description of howGrade Braking affects vehicle speedwhile the Tow/Haul Mode isactivated, see Tow/Haul Mode onpage 9‑49 for more information.




Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelis left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, butthe vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

When the fuel tank is low the FUELLEVEL LOW message appears.See Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑45 for more information.



Here are some situations ownerscan experience with the fuel gauge.None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the fuel tank's capacity tofill it.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.


Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric

English

The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.



Oil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity, but if readings are outsidethe normal operating range, the oilpressure light comes on. SeeEngine Oil Pressure Light onpage 5‑30 for more information.

A reading outside the normaloperating range can be caused by adangerously low oil level or someother problem causing low oil

pressure. Check the vehicle's oil assoon as possible. See “OILPRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑44 and Engine Oil onpage 10‑7.

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.





Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of howhard the vehicle is working. During amajority of the operation, the gaugereads 100°C (210°F) or less.If pulling a load or going up hills, itis normal for the temperature tofluctuate and go over the 113°C(235°F) mark. If the gauge reachesthe 125°C (260°F) mark, it indicatesthat the cooling system is workingbeyond its capacity.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22.


Voltmeter Gauge

This gauge indicates the batteryvoltage when the ignition isturned on.

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.



When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light onpage 5‑24 for more information.The voltmeter gauge may also readlower when in fuel economy mode.This is normal.

Readings outside the normaloperating range can also occurwhen a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in thevehicle and the engine is left idlingfor an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If thevehicle must be driven, turn off allaccessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.

Readings outside the normaloperating range indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

When the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds toremind a driver to fasten the safetybelt, unless the driver safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light flashes forseveral seconds, then comes onsolid for several more.

This chime and light sequence arerepeated if the driver remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is inmotion. If the driver safety belt isalready buckled, neither the chimenor the light comes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminder light,several seconds after the engine isstarted, a chime sounds for severalseconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safetybelt. The passenger safety belt light,located on the overhead console,comes on and stays on for severalseconds, flashes for several moreseconds and then comes on solidfor several more.

This chime and light sequence isrepeated if the passenger remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is inmotion.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays on itindicates there is an electricalproblem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensing

and diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑28.

The airbag readiness light comes onsolid for a few seconds when theengine is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.



{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message can also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5‑47 for more information.

Airbag On-Off LightIf the vehicle has an airbag on-offswitch, it also has a passengerairbag status indicator located in theoverhead console.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will light forseveral seconds as a system check.Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator ON or OFF,

or either the on or off symbol, willlight to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontalairbag.

When the right front passengerairbag is manually turned off usingthe airbag on-off switch in the glovebox, the indicator light OFF or theoff symbol will come on and stay onas a reminder that the airbag hasbeen turned off. This light will go offwhen the airbag has been turnedon. See Airbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑36 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



United States

Canada and Mexico

{ WARNING

If the right front passenger'sairbag is turned off for a personwho is not in a risk groupidentified by the nationalgovernment, that person will nothave the extra protection of anairbag. In a crash, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.

Do not turn off the passenger'sairbag unless the person sittingthere is in a risk group identifiedby the national government. SeeAirbag On-Off Switch onpage 3‑36 for more on this,including important safetyinformation.

{ WARNING



If the word ON or the on symbol islit, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate). See Airbag On-OffSwitch on page 3‑36 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or the airbagon-off switch. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position unlessthere is an airbag off switch locatedin the glove box. If there is anairbag off switch, the vehicle doesnot have a passenger systemsystem. See Airbag On-Off Switchon page 3‑36.

The passenger airbag statusindicator is on the overheadconsole. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑39 for importantsafety information.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,

or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.



If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑20 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑41 for moreinformation. This light could indicatethat there are problems with agenerator drive belt, or that there isan electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.




MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacementof the original tires with other

than those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. This couldalso result in a failure topass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.



To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected:. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑85. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A fewdriving trips should turn thelight off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑82.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.



Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments may have programs toinspect the on-vehicle emissioncontrol equipment. For theinspection, the emission systemtest equipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen if thebattery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemevaluates critical emissioncontrol systems during normaldriving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightWith the ignition on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. If thevehicle is driven with the parkingbrake engaged, a chime soundswhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

The vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on and achime sounds there could be abrake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

This light can also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brake Fluid onpage 10‑28 for more information.



Metric English

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it is ready to warn if there isa problem.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to pushor might go closer to the floor. It cantake longer to stop. If the light is stillon, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑97.


Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑27.



For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑41for all brake related DIC messages.


Four-Wheel-Drive Light

The four-wheel-drive light comes onwhen a vehicle with a manualtransfer case is shifted intofour-wheel drive and the front axleengages.

Some delay between the shiftingand the light coming on is normal.

See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑52 for more information.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑49.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

For vehicles with the StabiliTraksystem, this light comes on brieflywhile starting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the StabiliTrak systemand the vehicle might need service.When this warning light is on, theStabiliTrak system is off and doesnot limit wheel spin.

The light flashes if the system isactive and is working to assist thedriver with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑68 for more information.




Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a Tire PressureMonitor System, this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.It provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitor System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑47 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information Label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑61 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑64 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.




Low Fuel Warning Light

This light, under the fuel gauge,comes on briefly while the engine isbeing started.

This light and a chime comes onwhen the fuel tank is low on fuel.The Driver Information Center alsodisplays a “FUEL LEVEL LOW”message. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑45 for moreinformation. When fuel is added thislight and message should go off. If itdoes not, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

High-Beam on Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑3 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑6 for moreinformation.



Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑71 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

The DIC displays information aboutthis vehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located below thetachometer in the instrument panelcluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel, next to thesteering wheel. If the vehicle doesnot have DIC buttons, the tripodometer reset stem can be used toaccess some of the menu items.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See VehiclePersonalization (with DIC Buttons)on page 5‑50 for more information.



DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicleinformation, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto display the odometer, tripodometer, fuel range, averageeconomy, fuel used, timer,transmission temperature, andinstantaneous economy and ActiveFuel Management™ indicator. Thecompass and outside temperaturewill also be shown in the display.

The temperature will be shown in °Cor °F depending on the unitsselected.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,units, tire pressure readings forvehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), trailerbrake gain and output informationfor vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,engine hours, compass zonesetting, and compass recalibration.

U (Customization): Press thisbutton to customize the featuresettings on the vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization (with DIC Buttons)on page 5‑50 for more information.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items (with DICButtons)

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles. Pressing the trip odometerreset stem will also display theodometer.

To switch between metric andEnglish measurements, see “Units”later in this section.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button until TRIPdisplays. This display shows thecurrent distance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles since thelast reset for the trip odometer.Pressing the trip odometer resetstem will also display the tripodometer.



The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the set/resetbutton while the trip odometer isdisplayed. You can also reset thetrip odometer while it is displayed bypressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofkilometers (km) or miles driven sincethe ignition was last turned on andthe vehicle was moving. Once thevehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it isstarted again, and then theretro-active reset feature is

activated, the display will show 8 km(5 miles). As the vehicle beginsmoving, the display will thenincrease to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate number ofremaining kilometers (km) or milesthe vehicle can be driven withoutrefueling. The display will showLOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce different

fuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuelrange cannot be reset.

Average Economy

Press the trip/fuel button until AVGECONOMY displays. This displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. To reset AVGECONOMY, press and hold the set/reset button.

Fuel Used

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELUSED displays. This display showsthe number of liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.



Timer

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This display can beused as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shown onthe DIC. The timer will record up to99 hours, 59 minutes, and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

Transmission Temperature

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRANS TEMP displays. Thisdisplay shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Instantaneous Economy andActive Fuel Management™Indicator

If the vehicle has this display, pressthe trip/fuel button until INST ECONV8 displays. This display shows thecurrent fuel economy at a particularmoment and will change frequentlyas driving conditions change. Thisdisplay shows the instantaneousfuel economy in liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). Unlike averageeconomy, this screen cannot bereset.

An Active Fuel Managementindicator displays on the right sideof the DIC, while INST ECONdisplays on the left side. Active FuelManagement allows the engine tooperate on either four or eightcylinders, depending on drivingdemands. When Active FuelManagement is active, V4 willdisplay on the DIC. When ActiveFuel Management is inactive, V8will display. See Active FuelManagement™ on page 9‑41 formore information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Vehicle Information MenuItems (with DIC Buttons)

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaining usefullife. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑44. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑7. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance is

recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between metricor English units of measurement.Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select betweenMETRIC or ENGLISH units.All of the vehicle information willthen be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

Tire Pressure

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). Pressthe vehicle information button untilthe DIC displays FRONTTIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES kPa(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd pressure in a specific tire willappear in the display. See TirePressure on page 10‑61 and TireMessages on page 5‑47 for moreinformation.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with the vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.



Trailer Gain and Output

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,the trailer brake display appears inthe DIC. Press the vehicleinformation button until TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT display.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display.

To adjust trailer gain see “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑107 formore information.

Engine Hours

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil ENGINE HOURS displays. Thisdisplay shows the total number ofhours the engine has run.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items (with DIC Buttons)

Use the trip odometer reset stem toview the odometer and tripodometer. The Language selectionand Engine Hours display can alsobe accessed with the trip odometerreset stem.

Odometer

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil ODOMETER displays. Thisdisplay shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi).

Trip Odometer

Press the trip odometer resetstem until TRIP displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distancetraveled in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) since the last reset for thetrip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem while the tripodometer is displayed.




To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display thenumber of kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) driven since the ignitionwas last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehiclebegins moving, the trip odometerwill accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven8 km (5 miles) before it is startedagain, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 8 km (5 miles). Asthe vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 8.2 km(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

Language

This display allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear. To select alanguage:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until ODOMETER displays.

2. While in the ODOMETERdisplay, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem forthree seconds until the currentlyset language displays.

3. Continue to press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to scrollthrough all of the availablelanguages.

The available selections areENGLISH (default),FRANCAIS (French),ESPANOL (Spanish), and NOCHANGE.

4. Once the desired language isdisplayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to set thechoice.

Engine Hours

To display the ENGINE HOURS,place the ignition in LOCK/OFF orACC/ACCESSORY, then press andhold the trip odometer reset stem forfour seconds while viewing theODOMETER. This display showsthe total number of hours the enginehas run.

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items (without DICButtons)

Language

This display allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear. To select alanguage:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until ODOMETER displays.

2. While in the ODOMETERdisplay, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem forthree seconds until the currentlyset language displays.



3. Continue to press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem to scrollthrough all of the availablelanguages.

The available languages areENGLISH (default),FRANCAIS (French),ESPANOL (Spanish), and NOCHANGE.

4. Once the desired language isdisplayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to set thechoice.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRIP displays. This displayshows the current distance traveledin either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) since the last resetfor the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing and holding the tripodometer reset stem while the tripodometer is displayed.


To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display thenumber of kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) driven since the ignitionwas last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehiclebegins moving, the trip odometerwill accumulate mileage. Forexample, if the vehicle was driven8 km (5 miles) before it is startedagain, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 8 km (5 miles). Asthe vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 8.2 km(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

Transmission Temperature

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRANS TEMP displays. Thisdisplay shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F) .

Trailer Gain and Output

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,the trailer brake display appears inthe DIC. Press the trip odometerreset stem until TRAILER GAIN andOUTPUT display.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display.



To adjust trailer gain see “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑107 formore information.

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5‑6 for more information.

Oil Life

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. The engineoil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑44. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑7. In addition to theengine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V (Set/Reset) or the tripodometer reset stem.

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

When the vehicle’s battery isseverely discharged, this messagewill display and four chimes willsound. Start the vehicleimmediately. If the vehicle is notstarted and the battery continues todischarge, the climate controls,heated seats, and audio systemswill shut off and the vehicle mayrequire a jump start. These systemswill function again after the vehicleis started.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in the

instrument panel cluster. SeeCharging System Light onpage 5‑24. Driving with thisproblem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑27. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

SERVICE BRAKES SOON

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe brake system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service. See yourdealer.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays and a chimemay sound when there is a problemwith the ITBC system.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.



As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull your vehicle over tothe side of the road and turn theignition off. Check the wiringconnection to the trailer and turn theignition back on. If this message stilldisplays, either your vehicle or thetrailer needs service. See yourdealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TrailerTowing on page 9‑91 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the driver door is notfully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the hood is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN(Crew Cab)

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the driver side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the front passengerdoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN(Crew Cab)

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the passenger siderear door is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) TURNED OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑18. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑22for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑18.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑24 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑22for more information.

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the engine coolingsystem reaches unsafetemperatures for operation. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as itis safe to do so to avoid severedamage. This message clears whenthe engine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.



Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑9 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information.

ENGINE OIL HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil becomes hotter than thenormal operating temperature. Stopand allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑18.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damage mayoccur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stop thevehicle as soon as possible. Donot drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑7.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimemay sound when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑22for more information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.



Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the fuel level is low.Refuel as soon as possible. SeeFuel Gauge on page 5‑15 and Fuelon page 9‑81 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑25. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9‑85. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mile). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL

If the vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑74 formore information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

If the vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,after the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer resetstem to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display. Toturn the URPA system back on, seeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑74.



SERVICE PARK ASSIST

If the vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there is aproblem with the URPA system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑74 for more information.See your dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak andthis message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive;

however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer forservice. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑68 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFF

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when you turn offStabiliTrak, or when the stabilitycontrol has been automaticallydisabled. To limit wheel spin andrealize the full benefits of thestability enhancement system, youshould normally leave StabiliTrakon. However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if your vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow

and you want to rock your vehicle toattempt to free it, or if you aredriving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle is Stuck onpage 9‑22. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑68.

There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.. If the vehicle is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. If the brake system warning lightis on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑27.

. If the stability system takeslonger than usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. If an engine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer.

. If the vehicle is shifted into 4LO.



The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when the TractionControl System (TCS) is turned off.Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑68for more information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑20 andAirbag System on page 3‑28 formore information.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2‑12 for moreinformation.

Starting the VehicleMessages

FAST IDLE ON

If your vehicle has this feature, thismessage displays when the fast idlefeature is on. See Fast Idle Systemon page 9‑37 for more information.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑30. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑64 formore information. If the warningcomes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TPMS. Seeyour dealer.



TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the systemis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑67,Tire Rotation on page 10‑68, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑62, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑61 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

If the vehicle has the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low. This messagealso displays LEFT FRT (left front),RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR(left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear)

to indicate the location of the lowtire. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑30. Youcan receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem. If a tirepressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and setto those shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 10‑53, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑61. The DIC also shows thetire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑32.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVE

If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,this message may display if aproblem occurs with thefour-wheel-drive system. If thismessage appears, stop as soon aspossible and turn off the vehicle.Make sure the key is in the LOCK/OFF position for at least one minuteand then restart the vehicle andcheck for the message on the DICdisplay. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, thefour-wheel-drive system needsservice. See your dealer.



TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could lead tocostly repairs that would notbe covered by the warranty. Donot drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid orwhile the transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission tocool. This message clears and thechime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

CHECK TRAILER WIRING

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message may display and achime may sound when one of thefollowing conditions exists:. A trailer with electric brakes

becomes disconnected from thevehicle.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stopped, thismessage clears itself after ashort time.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage stays on until theignition is turned off.

. There is a short in the wiring tothe electric trailer brakes.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull the vehicle over to theside of the road and turn the ignitionoff. Check the wiring connection tothe trailer and turn the ignition backon. This message clears if the traileris reconnected. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. If thismessage still displays, either thevehicle or the trailer needs service.See your dealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9‑107 for moreinformation.



ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

TRAILER CONNECTED

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays briefly whena trailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle.

This message clears itself afterseveral seconds. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. Afterthis message clears, the TRAILERGAIN/OUTPUT display appears inthe DIC.

See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑32 and “IntegratedTrailer Brake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑107 formore information.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer fluid reservoiras soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26 for more information.

VehiclePersonalization

Vehicle Personalization(with DIC Buttons)The vehicle may have customizationcapabilities that allow you toprogram certain features to onepreferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on the vehicle. Onlythe options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.



The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen the vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, turn the headlamps off.

2. Press the customization buttonto scroll through the availablecustomizable options.

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following customization featuresallow you to program settings to thevehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

You can also change the languageby pressing the trip odometer resetstem. See “Language” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑32 for more information.



AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to turn offthe automatic door unlockingfeature. It also allows you to selectwhich doors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil AUTO DOOR UNLOCKappears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.

Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park) .

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).





REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback received whenlocking the vehicle with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback whenlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter if the doors are open.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback received whenunlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.





DELAY DOOR LOCK

On vehicles with a crew cab, thisfeature turns the delayed door lockson or off. When locking the doorswith the power door lock switch anda door is open, this feature willdelay locking the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice. SeeDelayed Locking on page 2‑8 formore information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select theamount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on when itis dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization button untilEXIT LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for twominutes.



APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to select ifthe exterior lights turn on brieflyduring low light periods afterunlocking the vehicle using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.



Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds, until the lock button onthe RKE transmitter is pressed,or until the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.



CHIME VOLUME

If available, this feature allows youto select the volume level of thechime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORS

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select if the outsidemirror(s) will automatically tilt downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse). See Park Tilt Mirrorson page 2‑17 for more information.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driveroutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).



PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver andpassenger outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT RECALL

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals” in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT RECALL appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

DOOR BUTTON ONLY: Noautomatic seat exit recall will occur.The recall will only occur afterpressing the easy exit seat button.

BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): Ifthe features are enabled through theEASY EXIT SETUP menu, thedriver seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition orthe easy exit seat button is pressed.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat will stay inthe original exit position, unless amemory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.



EASY EXIT SETUP

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select which areas willrecall with the automatic easy exitseat feature. It also allows you toturn off the automatic easy exitfeature. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals” in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3 and“EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier formore information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SETUP appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: No automatic seat exit willrecall.



SEAT ONLY (default): The driverseat will recall.



MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If the vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See “Memory Seat, Mirrors,and Pedals” in Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilMEMORY SEAT RECALL appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver seat and, on somevehicles, the outside mirrors willautomatically move to the storeddriving position when the unlockbutton on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.On some vehicles with theadjustable throttle and brake pedalfeature, the pedals will alsoautomatically move.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be set totheir factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO EXIT FEATURESETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to exit the menu.



If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This vehicle may have the UniversalRemote System.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use this system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remotecontrol transmitter for use in othervehicles, as well as for futureprogramming. Only the originalremote control transmitter is neededfor Fixed Code programming. Theprogrammed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold or



the lease ends. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons” inthis section.

Park the vehicle outside of thegarage when programming a garagedoor. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage dooror gate that is being programmed.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldafter 1996 are Rolling Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle,press the two outside buttons atthe same time for one totwo seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

2. In the garage, locate thegarage door opener receiver(motor-head unit). Find the“Learn” or “Smart” button. It canusually be found where thehanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unitand may be a colored button.Press this button. After pressingthis button, complete thefollowing steps in less than30 seconds.



3. Immediately return to thevehicle. Press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonthat will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light,above the selected button,should slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second,release the button when thegarage door moves. Theindicator light will blink rapidlyuntil programming is complete.

5. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Rolling Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 5, choosing a

different function button in Step 3than what was used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work, thegarage door opener is probably aFixed Code unit. Follow theprogramming instructions that followfor a Fixed Code garage dooropener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldbefore 1996 are Fixed Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage dooropener is a Fixed Code unit,remove the battery cover on thehand-held transmitter suppliedby the manufacturer of thegarage door opener motor.If there is a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above, thegarage door opener is a FixedCode unit. If you do not see arow of dip switches, returnto the previous section forProgramming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code.



Your hand-held transmitter canhave between 8 to 12 dipswitches depending on thebrand of transmitter.

The garage door opener receiver(motor head unit) could alsohave a row of dip switches thatcan be used when programmingthe Universal Home Remote.If the total number of switcheson the motor head andhand-held transmitter aredifferent, or if the dip switchsettings are different, use the dipswitch settings on the motorhead unit to program theUniversal Home Remote. Themotor head dip switch settingscan also be used when theoriginal hand-held transmitter isnot available.

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Three Positions

The panel of switches might notappear exactly as they do in theexamples above, but theyshould be similar.



The switch positions on thehand-held transmitter could belabeled as follows:. A switch in the up position

could be labeled as “Up,”“+,” or “On.”

. A switch in the downposition could be labeled as“Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

. A switch in the middleposition could be labeled as“Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

2. Write down the 8 to 12 switchsettings from left to right asfollows:. When a switch is in the up

position, write “Left.”. When a switch is in the

down position, write “Right.”

. If a switch is set betweenthe up and down position,write “Middle.”

The switch settings writtendown in Step 2 nowbecome the button strokesto be entered into theUniversal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter theswitch settings written downin Step 2, in order from leftto right, into the UniversalHome Remote, whencompleting Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, firstfirmly press all three buttons atthe same time for aboutthree seconds. Release thebuttons to put the UniversalHome Remote intoprogramming mode.

A. Left Button

B. Middle Button

C. Right Button

4. The indicator lights will blinkslowly. Enter each switch settingfrom Step 2 into your vehicle'sUniversal Home Remote. Youwill have two and one-halfminutes to complete Step 4. Nowpress one button on theUniversal Home Remote foreach switch setting as follows:. If you wrote “Left,” press

the left button (A) in thevehicle.



. If you wrote “Right,” pressthe right button (C) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Middle,” pressthe middle button (B) in thevehicle.

5. After entering all of the switchpositions, once again firmlypress and release all threebuttons at the same time. Theindicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button thatwill be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator lightabove the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

8. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Fixed Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1-8, choosing a differentbutton in Step 6 than what was usedfor the garage door opener.

Universal Remote SystemOperationPress and hold the appropriatebutton for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming UniversalHome Remote Buttons

Any of the three buttons can bereprogrammed by repeating theinstructions.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Code orFixed Code settings on theUniversal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons at the same time forapproximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, locateddirectly above the buttons, beginto blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin toblink, release both buttons. Thecodes from all buttons will beerased.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 13‑4.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Battery Load Management . . . . 6-9Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights


6-2 Lighting

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

O (Off): Turns off the automaticheadlamps and daytime runninglamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position will only work whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

When the vehicle is turned off andthe headlamps are in AUTO, theheadlamps may automaticallyremain on for a set time. The time of

the delay can be changed using theDIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑32

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,

the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before automaticallyturning off to prevent the batteryfrom being drained. Turn theheadlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

Push the turn signal/multifunctionlever toward the instrument panel tochange the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderFor vehicles with a radio, a reminderchime sounds when the headlampsor parking lamps are manuallyturned on, the ignition is off, and adoor is open. To disable the chime,turn the lamp off.


Lighting 6-3

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer53 (Headlamp High/LowBeam Changer): To change theheadlamps from low to high beam,push the lever toward the instrumentpanel. To return to low-beamheadlamps, pull the multifunctionlever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beams are on, thisindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They will stay on as long as youhold the lever toward you. Thehigh-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in Park.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL lamps are on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel lights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL lamps, turn theexterior lamps control to the OFFposition and then release. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, thetransmission must be in the P (Park)position before the DRL lamps canbe turned off.


6-4 Lighting

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson the headlamps at the normalbrightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampsswitch to the off position and thenrelease it. For vehicles first sold inCanada, the transmission must bein the P (Park) position before theautomatic headlamp system can beturned off.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel in the defroster grille whichregulates when the automaticheadlamps turn on. Do not coverthe sensor, otherwise theheadlamps will come on wheneverthe ignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or heavy overcastweather. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp systems so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system are only affectedwhen the light sensor detects achange in lighting lasting longerthan the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately one minutefor the automatic headlamp systemto change to DRL if it is brightenough outside. During that delay,the instrument panel cluster may notbe as bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness control

is in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑7.

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off, turnthe control to the off position.

The headlamps will also stay onafter you exit the vehicle. Thisfeature can be programmed usingthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization (withDIC Buttons) on page 5‑50.

If the vehicle is not equipped withDIC buttons, exit lighting isautomatic. When it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps remainon for 30 seconds after the ignitionis moved from ON/RUN toLOCK/OFF.


Lighting 6-5

For vehicles without a radio, theinstrument panel light remains on for30 seconds with the driver doorclosed. For vehicles with a radio,the instrument panel light remainson for 10 minutes with the driverdoor closed. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑35.

The regular headlamp system canbe turned on when needed.

Hazard Warning Flashers| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button located on top ofthe steering column, to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times iftow-haul mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more thanone second will cause the turnsignals to flash until you release thelever.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑46.


6-6 Lighting

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile), a chimewill sound at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Control (DIC). Toturn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, thecontrol is located next to the exteriorlamps control on the instrumentpanel, to the left of the steeringcolumn.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUNposition for the fog lamps tocome on.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn thefog lamps on or off. A light will comeon in the instrument panel cluster.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted LampIf the vehicle has this feature, thisbutton includes wiring provisions fora dealer or a qualified service centerto install an auxiliary roof lamp.

This button is located on theoverhead console.

When the wiring is connected to anauxiliary roof‐mounted lamp,pressing the bottom of the buttonwill activate the lamp and illuminatean indicator light at the bottom ofthis button. Pressing the top of thebutton will turn off the roof‐mountedlamp and indicator.


Lighting 6-7

The emergency roof lamp circuit isfused at 30 amps, so the totalcurrent draw of the attached lampsshould be less than this value. Theattachment points for the roof lampcircuits are two blunt cut wireslocated above the overheadconsole, a dark green switchedpower wire and a black ground wire.

For more information on roof mountemergency lamp installation, pleasevisit the GM Upfitter website atwww.gmupfitters.com or contactyour dealer.

If the vehicle has this button, thevehicle may have the snow plowprep package. For furtherinformation, see Adding a SnowPlow or Similar Equipment onpage 9‑120.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlD (Instrument PanelBrightness): This feature controlsthe brightness of the instrumentpanel lights and is located next tothe exterior lamps control.

Push the knob to extend out andthen it can be turned.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe instrument panel lights. Turningthe knob to the farthest clockwiseposition turns on the dome lamps.

Cargo LampThe cargo lamps come on byturning the instrument panelbrightness control knob to thefarthest clockwise position. Thisknob is located on the instrumentpanel and also turns on the domelamps.

The cargo lamps can be used ifmore light is needed in the cargoarea of the vehicle or in the top-boxstorage units.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon by turning the instrument panelbrightness knob, located on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering column, clockwise to thefarthest position. In this position, thedome lamps remain on whether adoor is opened or closed. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑7.


6-8 Lighting

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k (Dome Off): Press the buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with reading lamps,they are located on the overheadconsole.

To turn on the reading lamps, pressthe button located next to eachlamp. To turn them off, press thebutton again.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. To turn thelamps on or off, press the buttonlocated next to the lamp.

If the vehicle has a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system, pressthe lamp lenses to turn the lamps onor off.

The lamps are fixed and cannot beadjusted.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe vehicle has an illuminated entryfeature.

When the doors are opened, thedome lamps will come on if thedome override button is in theextended position. If the domeoverride button is pressed in, thelamps will not come on.

Exit LightingThe interior lamps come on whenthe key is removed from the ignition.They turn off automatically in20 seconds. The lights do not comeon if the dome override button ispressed in.


Lighting 6-9

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fast

enough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might be

displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑32.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps, if they are left on formore than 10 minutes after theignition is turned off. The cargolamp shuts off after 20 minutes. Thisprevents the battery fromrunning down.


6-10 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-13Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

IntroductionDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the vehicle'sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate NavigationSystem Manual.


7-2 Infotainment System

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

AM-FM Radio



Radio with CD (MP3) Shown; Radio with USB and CD (MP3), Radio withUSB and Six-Disc CD (MP3), and Radio with CD Similar



Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)

The vehicle has one of these radiosas its audio system.

Radios with CD and DVD

Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVDradio have a Bose® SurroundSound System. Some of its features

are explained later in this section,“Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade).”

Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVDradio may have a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. SeeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)

System on page 7‑36 for moreinformation on the vehicle's RSEsystem.

The DVD player is the top sloton the radio faceplate. Theplayer is capable of reading theDTS‐programmed DVD Audio orDVD Video media. (DTS and DTSDigital Surround are registeredtrademarks of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc.)

Dolby and the double-D symbol aretrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories.

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the volume.

4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio andAM-FM Radio with CD): Press toswitch the display between the radiostation frequency and the time.While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.



Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): Radios with SpeedCompensated Volume (SCV)automatically adjust the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle's speedchanges while driving, so that thevolume level stays consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation. Thedisplay times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)(AM-FM Radio and AM-FMRadio with CD)

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,or © SEEK.

. Press either\ FWD,

ors REV.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL, or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) (All ExceptAM-FM Radio and Radiowith CD)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust the bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired tonecontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.



3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,or © SEEK.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey positioned underthe BASS, MID, or TREB tab formore than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL, or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radioand AM-FM Radio with CD)

To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press` or press the f knobuntil the speaker control labeldisplays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,or © SEEK.

. Press either\ FWD,

ors REV.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) (All ExceptAM-FM Radio and Radiowith CD)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Press the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.



3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,or © SEEK.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

Locked or Loc: One of thesemessages will display when theTHEFTLOCK® system has lockedup the radio. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

For radios with the Radio DataSystem (RDS) feature, it only workswith FM stations that broadcastRDS information. This system reliesupon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only workswhen the information is available.While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters will display. In rarecases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.



4 (Information) (RDS Features):For vehicles with RDS features,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectradio stations.

© SEEK: Press to seek theprevious radio station. Press andhold for a few seconds until abeep sounds to scan for radiostations in descending order; pressthe © SEEK button again to stopscanning radio stations. The radioonly seeks and scans stations witha strong signal that are in theselected band.

For the AM-FM Radio, press andhold the © SEEK for four secondsuntil a double beep sounds to scanthe preset stations. The stationfrequency flashes while the radio isin the scan mode.

¨ SEEK: Press to seek the nextradio station. Press and hold for afew seconds until a beep sounds toscan for radio stations in ascendingorder; press the © SEEK buttonagain to stop scanning radiostations. The radio only seeks andscans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

For the AM-FM Radio, press andhold the ¨ SEEK for four secondsuntil a double beep sounds to scanthe preset stations. The stationfrequency flashes while the radio isin the scan mode.

s REV: Press to manually tune toa radio station in descending order.

\ FWD: Press to manually tune toa radio station in ascending order.

FAV (Favorites): Press to selectdifferent favorites pages for storedradio stations.

Storing Radio Stations

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked;, see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2 . Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Radios that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites. Up to36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the FAV button.Press the FAV button to go throughup to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AM,FM, or XM, if equipped, stations.



Radios that do not have a FAVbutton store radio stations aspresets. Up to 18 stations (6 FM1,6 FM2, and 6 AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedpushbuttons.

Setting Preset Stations

To store presets:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press and hold one of the sixnumbered pushbuttons forthree seconds until a beepsounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to storeadditional radio stations.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the sixsoftkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A service feeis required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., andwww.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

4 (Information) (XM Satellite RadioService): For vehicles with XM,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentXM channel. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.



Finding a Channel

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectan XM channel.

© SEEK: Press to go to theprevious XM channel.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nextXM channel.

s REV: Press to go to theprevious XM category.

\ FWD: Press to go to the nextXM category.

FAV (Favorites): Press to selectdifferent favorites pages for storedradio stations.

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM channels when theradio is in the XM mode.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

To find XM channels in a category:

1. Press the CAT button to displaythe category tabs. Continuepressing the CAT button until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressing the\ FWD or thes REVbuttons.

2. Press either of the two softkeysbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station in that category.

To go to the previous or next XMstation in the selected category,do one of the following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the softkey below theright or left arrows in thecategory tab.

. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.

3. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orBAND button to display thefavorites again.

Adding and Removing Categories

Categories cannot be added orremoved while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

To add or remove a category:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe XM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory to add or remove.

4. Press the softkey located underthe Add or Remove tab.

To restore all removedcategories, press the softkeyunder the Restore All tab.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.



Storing XM Channels

Drivers are encouraged to store XMchannels while the vehicle isparked; see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2 . Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Up to 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theFAV button. Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM,if equipped, stations.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to an XM channel.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of the sixsoftkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe set up using the MENU button.To set up the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.



Channel Unauth : This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio eight‐digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver or antennacould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.



AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference, somestatic can occur, especially aroundtall buildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just as withFM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base. If themast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tighten byhand until fully seated plusone quarter turn.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.



Audio Players

CD Player

Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD.It could get caught in the CD. If aCD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleanersis not advised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD player

and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “ CD PlayerMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixedwith water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a CD (Single CDPlayer)

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Inserting a CD(s) (Six-Disc CDPlayer)

LOAD^ : Press to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD player holdsup to six CDs.

To insert one CD:

1. Press and release the LOADbutton.

2. Wait for the message to insertthe disc.



3. Load a CD. Insert the CDpartway into the slot, label sideup. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs:

1. Press and hold the LOAD buttonfor two seconds. A beep soundsand Load All Discs displays.

2. Wait for the message on when toinsert the discs. The CD playertakes up to six CDs.

3. Press the LOAD button again tocancel loading more CDs.

Ejecting a CD (Single CDPlayer)

Z EJECT: Press and release toeject the disc. Remove the CDwhen Remove Disc displays.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds the disc isautomatically pulled back into theplayer.

Ejecting a CD (Six-Disc CDPlayer)

Z EJECT : Press and release toeject the disc that is currentlyplaying. Remove the CD whenRemove Disc displays. If the disc isnot removed, after several secondsthe disc is automatically pulled backinto the player.

To eject all CDs, press and hold theZ EJECT button for two seconds.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source. TheCD is controlled by the buttons onthe radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7‑45 for moreinformation.

When a CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays on the left side ofthe radio display. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press tocycle between CD or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing the discand/or track number will displaywhen a CD is in the player. Pressagain and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice; see Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑31 for more information. If aportable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found”displays.



4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track if more than10 seconds on the CD have played.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than 10 seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RPT (Repeat): For the AM-FMRadio with CD, press and releasethe RPT button to repeat the currenttrack. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, doone of the following:

For the AM-FM Radio with CD:

1. Press the RDM button until therandom icon displays.

2. Press the RDM button againuntil the random icon disappearsfrom the display.

For the Radio with CD (MP3) andRadio with USB and CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

For the Radio with USB andSix-Disc CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandomize All Discs displays toplay tracks from all CDs loadedin random order.

2. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays to playtracks from a single CD inrandom order.

3. Press the same softkey again toturn off random play.



MP3‐Supported Files

The Radio with CD (MP3), Radiowith USB and CD (MP3), and Radiowith USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3)have the capability of playing anMP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.

Format

Radios that have the capability ofplaying MP3s can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixedbit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps ora variable bit rate.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. If both formatsare on the disc, the radio reads allMP3 files first, then theuncompressed CD audio files.

CD‐R‐ or CD‐RW‐Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 50 playlists.. Up to 255 files.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda

file extension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a CD display asF1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.



File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or 4 pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe file name is not displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

CDs that have preprogrammedplaylists reated using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,there is no playlist‐editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playlists can be changed by usingthe softkeys below the Sc andc T tabs, the f knob,the © SEEK button, or the ¨ SEEKbutton. An MP3 CD-R or CD-RWthat has been recorded withoutusing file folders can be played. If aCD-R or CD-RW contains more thanthe maximum of 50 folders,15 playlists, and 512 folders andfiles, the player allows access andnavigates up to the maximum, butall items over the maximum are notaccessible.

Playing an MP3

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist information

displays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3's onthe CD currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.



Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random, doone of the following:

For the Radio with CD (MP3) andRadio with USB and CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays.


For the Radio with USB andSix-Disc CD (MP3):

1. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab untilRandomize All Discs displays toplay tracks from all CDs loadedin random order.

2. Press the softkey positionedunder the RDM tab until RandomCurrent Disc displays to playtracks from a single CD inrandom order.


h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey below theh tab to playthe files in order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the desired artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.



The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3's from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD ejects, itcould be for one of the followingreasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the CD.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

CD/DVD Player

Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a disc.It could get caught in the CD orDVD player. If a disc is recorded ona personal computer and adescription label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded discwith a marking pen.

The use of CD/DVD lens cleaners isnot advised, due to the risk ofcontaminating the lens of the opticswith lubricants internal to the CDand DVD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.



Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, thesound quality can be reduced due toCD-R or CD-RW quality, the methodof recording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD playerscans the bottom surface of thedisc. If the surface of a disc isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the disc does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a disc whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up discs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is soiled,clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth ordampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild,neutral detergent solution mixed

with water. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Audio Output

Only one audio source can be heardthrough the speakers at one time.An audio source is defined as DVDslot, CD slot, XM, FM‐AM, frontauxiliary jack, USB port, or rearauxiliary jack.

Press theO button to turn the radioon. The radio can be heard throughall of the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listen tothe radio (AM, FM, or XM ifequipped) by pressing the BANDbutton or the DVD/CD AUX button toselect CD slot, DVD slot, frontauxiliary input, USB port, or rearauxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged intothe radio’s front auxiliary input jack,USB port, or the rear auxiliary jack,the front seat passengers are ableto listen to playback from thissource through the vehicle

speakers. See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack” in Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑31, or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑36 for more information.

In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakerscan be muted when the RSA poweris turned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑45 formore information.

Inserting a Disc

Insert a disc partway into either slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the disc should begin playing.(Loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat, ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.)



Ejecting a Disc

Z CD (Eject): Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. The CD ejects from thebottom slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc that iscurrently playing in the top slot.A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, due tounknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

Playing a CD (in Either theDVD or CD Slot)

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source. TheCD is controlled by the buttons onthe radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7‑45 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks(the upper slot is the DVD deck andthe lower slot is the CD deck) of theradio are compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs,and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text tabDVD or CD symbol displays on theleft side of the radio display. Aseach new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliarywhen listening to the radio. TheDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber will display when a disc is ineither slot. Press the DVD/CD AUXbutton again and the systemautomatically searches for anauxiliary input device; see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑31 for moreinformation. If a portable audioplayer is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” displays. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and doesnot indicate “No Aux Input Device.”If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX buttoncycles through all available options,such as: DVD slot, CD slot, FrontAuxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary



(if available). See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” in AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑31 or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑36 for more information.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remotecontrol.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional text information related tothe current song. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe disc that is currently playing.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track, if more thanfive seconds on the CD haveplayed.

Press to go to the previous track ifless than five seconds on the CDhave played.

Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving backwardthrough the tracks on the CD.


Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track.

RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order. To use random:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays.


MP3‐ and WMA‐SupportedFiles

Format

The radio can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio plays discs that containboth uncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files depending on whichslot the disc is loaded into.

The DVD player only readsuncompressed audio and ignoresMP3/WMA files on a mixedmode disc.

The CD player reads bothuncompressed audio and MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc.Uncompressd audio is playedbefore MP3/WMA files. Press theCAT (category) button to togglebetween uncompressed audio andMP3/WMA files.



CD‐R‐ or CD‐RW‐Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The DVD player supports:. Up to 255 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 40 sessions.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl


file extension.

The CD player supports:. Up to 512 files and folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl


file extension.

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays asF1 ROOT on the radio.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the rootdirectory called CD accesses all ofthe CD audio tracks on the disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

No Folder

When the disc contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functiondoes not function on a disc that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder, the radio displays ROOT.

When the disc contains onlyplaylists and compressed audiofiles, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. Thefolder down and the folder upbuttons search playlists first andthen go to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of thefolder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.



. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or 4 pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the file name do not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists that werecreated using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed; however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treated asspecial folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playing an MP3 or WMA (inEither the DVD or CD Slot)

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only).

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than five secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times, if less thanfive seconds have played, tocontinue moving backward throughtracks.


Press and hold, or press multipletimes, to continue moving forwardthrough tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below the Sc tab togo to the first track in the previousfolder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey below thec T tab to go tothe first track in the next folder.



RDM (Random): Press to listen totracks in random, rather thansequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays


h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey below theh tab to playfiles in order by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artist

are played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey below the SortBy tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe Album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theBack tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrows,and songs from the current albumbegin to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album in

alphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

Using the DVD Player

The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remotecontrol, the RSA system, or by thebuttons on the radio faceplate. See“Remote Control” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑36 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑45 formore information.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audio CDsand CD-R/RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, and DVD+R/RW media, along with MP3 andWMA formats.



If an error message displays on thevideo screen or the radio, see “DVDDisplay Error Messages” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑36, and “CD/DVD Player Messages” later in thissection for more information.

Inserting a Disc

Insert a disc partway into the topslot, label side up. The player pullsit in and the disc should beginplaying. “Loading Disc” shows onthe radio display. At the same time,the radio displays a softkey menu ofoption(s). Some discs automaticallyplay the movie while othersdefault to the softkey menu display,which requires the Play, Enter,or Navigation softkeys to bepressed, either by softkey or by therear seat passenger using theremote control.

Loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat, ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds fora DVD.

Ejecting a Disc

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc currentlyplaying in the top slot. A beepsounds and Ejecting Disc displays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, due tounknown format, etc., and the discfails to eject, press and hold formore than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliarywhen listening to the radio. TheDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber will display when a disc is ineither slot. Press the DVD/CD AUXbutton again and the systemautomatically searches for anauxiliary input device; see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑31 for moreinformation. If a portable audio

player is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” displays. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot,the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and doesnot indicate “No Aux Input Device.”If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX buttoncycles through all available options,such as: DVD slot, CD slot, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary (ifavailable). See “Using the AuxiliaryInput Jack” in Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑31 or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑36 for more information.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remotecontrol.



O (Power): Press to turn the radioon or off. Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the volume. Press andhold for more than two seconds toturn off the entire radio and RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) systemand to start the Parental Controlfeature. Parental Control preventsthe rear seat occupant fromoperating the Rear Seat Audio(RSA) system or remote control.

A lock symbol displays next to theclock display. The Parental Controlfeature remains on until the knob ispressed and held for more thantwo seconds again, or until thedriver turns the ignition off and exitsthe vehicle.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks ona CD or DVD.

© SEEK: Press to return to the startof the current track or chapter.Press again to go to the previoustrack or chapter. This button might

not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack or chapter. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the CD or DVD atfive times the normal speed. To stopfast reversing, press again. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press tofast forward the CD or DVD atfive times the normal speed. To stopfast forwarding, press again. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V(Video)

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several taboptions for playback. Press thesoftkey located under any tab optionduring DVD-V playback.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe Play or Pause tab displayed onthe radio, to toggle between pausingor restarting playback of a DVD.If the forward arrow is showing onthe display, the system is in pausemode. If the Pause tab is showingon the display, the system is inplayback mode. If the DVD screenis off, press the play button to turnthe screen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after thepreviews have finished, althoughthere could be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD does notbegin playing the movieautomatically, press the softkeylocated under the play/pausesymbol tag displayed on the radio.



If the DVD still does not play, referto the on-screen instructions,if available.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thesoftkeys located under thenavigation arrows to navigate thecursor through the DVD menu. Aftermaking a selection press thisbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V and DVD-Amenus and controls through theremote control. See “RemoteControl” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑36 for more information.The video screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V isinserted into the DVD slot, and doesnot automatically power on whenthe DVD-A is inserted into the DVDslot. It must be manually turned onby the rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A(Audio)

Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several taboptions for playback. Press thesoftkey located under any tab optionduring DVD-A playback.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio, to toggle between pausingor restarting playback of a DVD.If the forward arrow is showing on

the display, the system is in pausemode. If the pause tab is showingon the display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Groupr : Press to cyclethrough musical groupings on theDVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press to cyclethrough audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc. Thevideo screen shows the audiostream changing.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V and DVD-Amenus and controls through theremote control. See “RemoteControl” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑36 for more information.



The video screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V isinserted into the DVD slot, and doesnot automatically power on whenthe DVD-A is inserted into the DVDslot. It must be manually turned onby the rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

Stopping and ResumingPlayback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, pressthec button on the remotecontrol, or press the softkey locatedunder thec or ther / j tabsdisplayed on the radio. If the radio issourced to something other thanDVD-V, press the DVD/CD AUXbutton to make DVD-V the activesource.

To resume DVD playback, press ther / j button on the remote control,or press the softkey located underther / j tab on the radio. TheDVD should resume play fromwhere it last stopped if the disc has

not been ejected and the stopbutton has not been pressed twiceon the remote control. If the dischas been ejected or the stop buttonhas been pressed twice on theremote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

CD/DVD Player Messages

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whentheZ or DVD/CD AUX button ispressed on the radio.

Optical Error: This messagedisplays if the disc was insertedupside down.

Disk Read Error: This messagedisplays if a disc was inserted withan invalid or unknown format.

Player Error: This messagedisplays if there are disc load ordisc eject problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CD/DVD player.

If the disc is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood disc.



If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

Radios with an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of thefaceplate can connect to an externalaudio device such as an iPod®,MP3 player, or CD player, for use asanother source for audio listening.This input jack is not an audiooutput; do not plug headphones intothe front auxiliary input jack.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2 formore information on driverdistraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressthe radio CD/AUX button to beginplaying audio from the device overthe vehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

O (Power/Volume): Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume ofthe portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might have tobe made from the portable device ifthe volume is not loud or softenough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD when a portable audiodevice is playing. Press again andthe system begins playing audiofrom the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD AUX (DVD/CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycle throughDVD, CD, or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The DVD/CDtext tab and a message showingtrack or chapter number will displaywhen a disc is in either slot. Pressagain and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays. If a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot, theDVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and doesnot indicate “No Aux Input Device.”If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX buttoncycles through all available options,



such as: DVD slot, CD slot, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary(if available). See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” in this section,or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” underRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑36 for moreinformation.

Using the USB Port

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPod®

using the radio buttons and knobs.See “Playing an MP3” in CD Playeron page 7‑14 or CD/DVD Player onpage 7‑20 for information abouthow to connect and control a USBstorage device or an iPod.

USB Support

The USB connector is located onthe dashboard or in the centerconsole, and uses the USB 2.0standard.

USB‐Supported Devices. USB flash drive. Portable USB hard drive. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod nano. iPod touch. iPod classic

Not all iPods and USB drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying the iPod, goto www.apple.com/support.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod.

USB‐Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders. Up to 8 folders in depth. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension. AAC files stored on an iPod. FAT16. FAT32

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console or onthe instrument panel.



To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located in thecenter console or on the instrumentpanel. If the vehicle is on and theUSB connection works, “OK todisconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod, and iPodappears on the radio display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the auxiliaryinput jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs, anddisplay song information on theradio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than 10 secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Releases REV to resume playing.The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed time ofthe file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.



j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track. The tabappears raised when pause is beingused. Press the softkey below jagain to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive. To browse and selectfiles:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.



4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,<, or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs/ShuffleSongs): Press the softkey below= or< to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.



Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio. TheRSE system includes a radio with aDVD player, a video display screen,audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.See CD/DVD Player on page 7‑20for more information on the vehicle'sCD/DVD player.

Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system mightnot work until the temperature iswithin the operating range. Theoperating range for the RSE systemis above −20°C (−4°F) or below60°C (140°F). If the temperature ofthe vehicle is outside this range,heat or cool the vehicle until thetemperature is within the operatingrange of the RSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon which radio the vehicle has. Tostart Parental Control, press andhold the radio power button for morethan two seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),DVD, and/or CD. While ParentalControl is on, a padlock icondisplays.

The radio can be turned back onwith a single press of the powerbutton, but the RSE system willremain under Parental Control.

To turn Parental Control off, pressand hold the radio power button formore than two seconds. The RSEreturns from where it was previouslyleft and the padlock icon disappearsfrom the radio display.

Parental Control can also be turnedoff by inserting or ejecting any disc,pressing the play icon on the radioDVD display menu, or changing anignition position.



Headphones

A. Battery cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 switch

C. Power button

D. Volume control

E. Power indicator light

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated toRear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.

These headphones can be used tolisten to the radio, CDs, DVDs,MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliarysource connected to A/V jacks orthe auxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button,channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volumecontrol.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light comes on, but thereis intermittent sound and/or static onthe headphones, or if the indicatorlight does not come on, the batteriesmight need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection for more information. Switchthe headphones to Off when notin use.

Infrared transmitters are located atthe rear of the overhead console.The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off, or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmittersfor more than three minutes. If youmove too far forward or step out ofthe vehicle, the headphones losethe audio signal.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volume controllocated on the right side.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception. Thesymbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positioned onthe right ear.



Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool, dryplace.

If the foam ear pads attached to theheadphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slidethe battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audio orvideo signals to be connected froman auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. Adapterconnectors or cables (not included)may be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks.Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.



The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input. Thewhite jack (B) is for the left audioinput. The red jack (C) is for theright audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The audio of theconnected source can be listened toover the speakers by sourcing theradio to the auxiliary device or bysourcing the RSA to the Rear Auxand listening with the wirelessheadphones on Channel 2 or with

the wired headphones. See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack” underAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑31 formore information about changingthe source.

Changing the RSE Video ScreenSettings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu. To change any feature:

1. Press thez (display menu)button on the remote control.

2. Use the remote control n,q,p,o (navigation) arrows andther (enter) button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press thez button again toremove the setup menu from thescreen.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following possiblesources:. Wireless headphones. Vehicle speakers. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks

on the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑45 formore information.



When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen

The video screen is located in theoverhead console.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

When the video screen is not inuse, push it up into its lockedposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on. This is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.Use the remote control power buttonor eject the disc to turn off thescreen.

The overhead console contains theinfrared transmitters for the wirelessheadphones and the infraredreceivers for the remote control.They are located at the rear of theconsole.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rear ofthe RSE overhead console andpress the desired button. Directsunlight or very bright light couldaffect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signals fromthe remote control. If the remotecontrol does not seem to beworking, the batteries might need tobe replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.



Objects blocking the line of sightcould also affect the function of theremote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O (power)button can be used to turn on thevideo screen display and start thedisc. The radio can also turn on thevideo screen display. See Operationon page 7‑2 for more information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

If the remote control becomes lostor damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses acode set of Toshiba®.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button toturn the video screen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this buttonto turn the remote control backlighton. The backlight automaticallytimes out after 7 to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while thebacklight is on.

v (Title): Press this button toreturn the DVD to the main menu ofthe DVD. This function could varyfor each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this buttonto access the DVD menu. The DVDmenu is different on every DVD.Use the navigation arrows to movethe cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press theenter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.

n,q , p ,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button toselect the choice that is highlightedin any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press thisbutton to adjust the brightness,screen display mode (normal, full,or zoom), and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press this button toexit the current active menu andreturn to the previous menu. Thisbutton operates only when thedisplay menu or a DVD menu isactive.

c (Stop): Press this button tostop playing, fast reversing, or fastforwarding a DVD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press thisbutton to start playing a DVD. Pressthis button while a DVD is playing topause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.



While the DVD is playing, the DVDcan be played slowly by pressingthe play/pause button then pressingthe fast forward button. The DVDcontinues playing in a slow playmode. Also, reverse can be playedslowly by pressing the play/pausebutton and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow playmode, press the play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press this button to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressthis button to go to the beginning ofthe next chapter or track. Thisbutton might not work while theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press thisbutton to quickly reverse the DVD orCD. To stop fast reversing a DVD

video, press the play/pause button.To stop fast reversing a DVD audioor CD, release the fast reversebutton. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press thisbutton to fast forward the DVD orCD. To stop fast forwarding a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release the fast forwardbutton. This button might not workwhile the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press this button tochange audio tracks on DVDs thathave this feature when the DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button toturn on or off subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when a

DVD is playing. The format andcontent of this function vary foreach disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this buttonto switch the system between theDVD player and an auxiliary source.

d (Camera): Press this button tochange camera angles on DVDsthat have this feature while a DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button withinthree seconds after entering anumeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressthis button to select chapter or tracknumbers greater than nine. Pressthis button before entering thenumber.



Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries, do the following:

1. Slide the rear cover back on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure theyare installed correctly using thediagram on the inside of theremote control.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

There is no power. The ignition might not be turned toON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen.There are black borders on the topand bottom or on both sides, or thepicture looks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings inthe setup menu by pressing thedisplay menu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, the picture movesor scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is noobstruction between the remotecontrol and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make surethey are not dead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, andpushing Play, sometimes the DVDstarts where it left off andsometimes at the beginning.

If the stop button was pressed onetime, the DVD player resumesplaying where the DVD wasstopped. If the stop button waspressed two times, the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning ofthe DVD.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action

The auxiliary source is running, butthere is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen isin the auxiliary source mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphoneaudio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, lowbatteries, reception range, andinterference from cellular telephonetowers, or use a cellular telephonein the vehicle.Check that the headphones are oncorrectly using the L (left) and R(right) on the headphones.

The remote and/or the headphonesare lost.

See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen issourced to the DVD player.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on the radio that is in thevehicle. The video screen candisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whenEJECT or DVD AUX is pressed onthe radio.



DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile faxmachines, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video Screen

When cleaning the video screen,use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemVehicles with this feature allow therear seat passengers to listen toand control any of the musicsources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or otherauxiliary sources. However, the rearseat passengers can only controlthe music sources the front seatpassengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dualcontrol is allowed). For example,rear seat passengers can controland listen to a CD through theheadphones, while the driver listensto the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The radio functionality is controlledby both the RSA and the front radio.Only one band can be tuned to atone time. Changing the band on theRSA or the front radio will changethe band on the other system,if they are both sourced to the radio.

The RSA functions can be usedeven while the main radio is off. Thefront audio system will display theheadphone icon when the RSA ison, and it will disappear from thedisplay when the RSA is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

Depending on the audio system, therear speakers may continue to playwhen the RSA audio is activethrough the headphones.



To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input (ifavailable), located on the front audiosystem. Turn the iPod on, thenchoose the front auxiliary input withthe RSA SRCE button.

P (Power): Press this button toturn the RSA on or off.

Volume: Turn the volume knob toincrease or decrease the volume ofthe wired headphones. The leftknob controls the left headphonesand the right knob controls the rightheadphones.

SRCE (Source): Press thisbutton to switch between the radio(AM‐FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD,and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.

© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM,AM, or XM™ (if equipped), pressthe seek arrows to go to theprevious or to the next station orchannels and stay there. Thisfunction is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

Press and hold either seek arrowuntil the display flashes, to tune toan individual station. The displaystops flashing after the buttons havenot been pushed for more thantwo seconds. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

While listening to a disc, press theleft seek arrow to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter(if more than 10 seconds haveplayed). Press the right seek arrowto go the next track or chapter onthe disc. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

While a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press either seek arrowto perform a cursor up or down onthe menu. Hold either seek arrow toperform a cursor left or right onthe menu.



PROG (Program): Press thisbutton to go to the next preset radiostation or channel set on the mainradio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

While a CD or DVD‐A disc isplaying, press this button to go tothe beginning of the CD or DVD‐A.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the CD or DVD‐A.

While a disc is playing in the CD orDVD changer, press this button toselect the next disc, if multiple discsare loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

While a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press the PROG buttonto perform the menu function, Enter.

Phone

BluetoothVehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls.The system can be used while thekey is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The range ofthe Bluetooth system can be up to9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones supportall functions, and not all phones areguaranteed to work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.



Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑3 for more information.

b g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.

Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.



5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN number that was providedin Step 3. After the PIN issuccessfully entered, the systemprompts you to provide a namefor the paired cell phone. Thisname will be used to indicatewhich phones are paired andconnected to the vehicle. See“Listing All Paired andConnected Phones” later in thissection for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.


2. Say “Bluetooth”.

3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers.

Command Usage

Store This command will store a phone number,or a group of numbers as a name tag.

Digit Store This command allows a phone number tobe stored as a name tag by entering thedigits one at a time.

Delete This command is used to delete individualname tags.

Delete All Name Tags This command deletes all stored name tagsin the Hands‐Free Calling Directory and theOnStar Turn‐by‐Turn DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.



Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”



Making a Call

Calls can be made using the following commands.

Command Usage

Dial or Call The dial or call command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phone number ora stored name tag.

Digit Dial This command allows a phone number tobe dialed by entering the digits one ata time.

Re‐dial This command is used to dial the lastnumber used on the cell phone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”




Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Presscx to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Presscx to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Presscx to end a call.



Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b g, andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b g, andthen say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready,”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.



Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see thepreviou section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for FCC information.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems(with Air Conditioning) . . . . . . 8-1

Climate Control Systems(with Heater Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Climate Control Systems

Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning)With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.

A. Fan Control



D. Air Conditioning

E. Outside Air

F. Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the front system off.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflowinside the vehicle. The knob can bepositioned between two modes toselect a combination of thosemodes.

Select from the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air.Recirculation cannot be selected infloor mode.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and the side windowvents, with some air directed to thefloor vents. The systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beselected in the defog or defrostmode. When either mode isselected, the system runs the airconditioning compressor, unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

: (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat outside air is on. In this modeoutside air circulates throughout thevehicle. The outside air mode canbe used with all modes, but itcannot be used with therecirculation mode.



? (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog or defrostmodes. If recirculation is selectedwith one of these modes, theindicator light flashes three timesand then turns off. While inrecirculation mode the windows mayfog when the weather is cold anddamp. To clear the fog, select eitherthe defog or defrost mode andincrease the fan speed.

The recirculation mode can beturned off by pressing the outsideair button, or by turning off theignition.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning is on.The air conditioning can be selectedin any mode as long as the fanswitch is on.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

Rear Window Defogger

For vehicles with a rear windowdefogger, a warming grid is used toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Anindicator light on the button comeson to show that the rear windowdefogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The rear window defoggerstays on for approximately10 minutes after the button ispressed, unless the ignition isturned to ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF. The defogger can alsobe turned off by turning off theengine.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.



Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only)With this system the heating and ventilation can be controlled.

A. Fan Control



Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the front system off.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle. Theknob can be positioned betweentwo modes to select a combinationof those modes.

Select from the following:


) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some air directedto the windshield, side window, andsecond row floor outlets. In thismode, the system automaticallyselects outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and the side windowvents, with some air directed to thefloor vents. The systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.



Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation systemdescribed later in this section.

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

B. Fan Control

C. AUTO

D. Defrost

E. Recirculation

F. Outside Air

G. Air Delivery Mode Control

H. Display

I. On/Off

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.Outside air still enters the vehicle,and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed bypressing the mode button.Recirculation can be selected onceyou have selected vent or bi-levelmode. The temperature can also beadjusted using either temperaturebutton. If the air delivery mode ortemperature settings are adjustedwith the system off, the displayilluminates briefly to show thesettings and then returns to off. Thesystem can be turned back on bypressing eitherO, D, C,#, thedefrost or the AUTO button.



Driver and Passenger SideTemperature Controls

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are used toadjust the temperature of the aircoming through the system on thedriver or passenger side of thevehicle. The temperature can beadjusted even if the system isturned off. This is possible sinceoutside air always flows through thesystem as the vehicle is movingforward unless it is set torecirculation mode. See“Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increaseor decrease the cabin temperature.The driver side or passenger sidetemperature display shows thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

The passenger temperature settingcan be set to match the drivertemperature setting by pressingthe PASS button and turning offthe PASS indicator. When thepassenger temperature setting is setdifferent than the driver setting, theindicator on the PASS buttonilluminates and both the driver sideand passenger side temperaturedisplays are shown.

When in defrost mode thepassenger temperature settingcannot be changed.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Whenautomatic operation is active, thesystem controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

Use the steps below to place theentire system in automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thedisplay changes to show thecurrent temperature(s) andAUTO is lit on the display. Thecurrent air delivery mode andfan speed are also displayed forabout five seconds.

When AUTO is selected, the airconditioning operation and airinlet are automatically controlled.The air conditioning compressormay run when the outsidetemperature is above freezing.The air inlet will normally be setto outside air. If it is hot outside,the air inlet may automaticallyswitch to the recirculate mode tohelp quickly cool down the airinside the vehicle. The light onthe button comes on inrecirculation.



2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting, startwith a 23°C (74°F) temperaturesetting and allow about20 minutes for the system toregulate. Use the driver orpassenger temperature buttonsto adjust the temperature settingas necessary. If a temperaturesetting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen,the system remains at themaximum cooling setting. If atemperature setting of 32°C(90°F) is chosen, the systemremains at the maximum heatsetting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not causethe vehicle to heat or cool anyfaster.

Do not cover the solar sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel near the windshield. Thissensor regulates air temperaturebased on sun load. For moreinformation on the solar sensor, see“Sensors” later in this section.

To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system delays turningthe fan on until warm air isavailable. The length of delaydepends on the engine coolanttemperature. Pressing the fanswitch overrides this delay andchanges the fan to a selectedspeed.

Manual Operation

D C (Fan Control): Press thesebuttons to increase or decrease thefan speed.

Pressing either fan button while inautomatic control places the fanunder manual control. The fansetting remains displayed and theAUTO light turns off. The airdelivery mode remains underautomatic control.

H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press these buttons to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press either button untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay.

Pressing either mode button whilethe system is off changes the airdelivery mode without turning thesystem on.

Pressing either mode button while inautomatic control places the modeunder manual control. The airdelivery mode setting displays andthe AUTO light turns off. The fanremains under automatic control.


) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtoward the windshield and sidewindow outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some to thewindshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets. In thismode, the system automaticallyselects outside air.



- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents. Inthis mode, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents,with some directed to the floorvents. In this mode, the systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

The passenger temperature controlcannot be activated while in defrostmode. If the PASS button is

pressed, the button indicator flashesthree times and will not work. If thepassenger temperature buttons areadjusted, the driver temperatureindicator changes. The passengertemperature will not be displayed.

If vent, bi-level, or floor mode isselected again, the climate controlsystem displays the previoustemperature settings.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C)compressor on and off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is on.

If this button is pressed when the airconditioning compressor isunavailable due to outsideconditions, the indicator flashesthree times and then turns off. If theair conditioning is on and theoutside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the air

conditioning light turns off to showthat the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

On hot days, open the windows longenough to let hot inside air escape.This helps to reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat recirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.



The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostmodes. If recirculation is selectedwith one of those modes, theindicator light flashes three timesand then turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode, thewindows may fog when the weatheris cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

The recirculation mode can beturned off by pressing the outsideair button, or by turning off theignition.

; (Outside Air): Press to turn theoutside air mode on. An indicatorlight on the button comes on toshow that outside is on. Whenselected, air from outside thevehicle circulates throughout thevehicle. The recirculation modecannot be used with the outsideair mode.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Forvehicles with this feature, press toturn the defogger on or off.It automatically turns off severalminutes after it has been activated.The defogger can also be turned offby turning the engine off. Do notdrive the vehicle until all windowsare clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Heated Mirror: For vehicles withheated outside rearview mirrors, themirrors heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror when

the rear window defog button ispressed. See Power Mirrors onpage 2‑15.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.



The interior temperature sensor,located in the headliner, measuresthe temperature of the air inside thevehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor located behindthe front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature andhelps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover on thefront of the vehicle could cause afalse reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.

Air VentsUse the air outlets located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel to direct theairflow. Use the thumbwheels nearthe air outlets to open or close offthe airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-18Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-19Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-22Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-32Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-37Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Active FuelManagement™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-43Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Brake Assist (Except With4.3L V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-67

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-68Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-74Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-82Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-82California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-83Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83


9-2 Driving and Operating

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-84Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 9-107Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . 9-120

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-123

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt, see Safety Belts onpage 3‑12.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.



Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show that almost40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's system canmake crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — is

in a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑68.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.



BrakingSee Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑27.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second, avehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft). Thatcould be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition ofthe road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to push

down. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering


If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.



Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because there isno room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like these. First, applythe brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑4 . It is better to remove asmuch speed as possible from acollision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.



Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is onlyslightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy. Easeoff the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so thatthe vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches), aboutone-eighth turn, until the right front

tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.



While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingVehicles with four-wheel drive canbe used for off-road driving.Vehicles without four-wheel driveand vehicles with 20‐inch tire/wheelassemblies should not be drivenoff-road except on a level, solidsurface.

The airbag system is designed towork properly under a wide range ofconditions, including off‐road usage.Always wear your safety belt andobserve safe driving speeds,especially on rough terrain.

Drinking and driving can be verydangerous on any road and this iscertainly true for off-road driving. Atthe very time you need specialalertness and driving skills, yourreflexes, perceptions, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have aserious — or even fatal — accidentif you drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.

Off-roading can be great fun but hassome definite hazards. The greatestof these is the terrain itself. Whenoff-road driving, traffic lanes are notmarked, curves are not banked, andthere are no road signs. Surfacescan be slippery, rough, uphill,or downhill.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate thevehicle correctly off‐road couldresult in loss of vehicle control orvehicle rollover.

Off-roading involves some newskills. That is why it is veryimportant that you read thesedriving tips and suggestions to helpmake off-road driving safer andmore enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work done.. Make sure there is enough fuel,

that fluid levels are where theyshould be, and that the sparetire is fully inflated.

. Be sure to read all theinformation aboutfour-wheel-drive vehiclesin this manual.



. Make sure all underbodyshields, if the vehicle has them,are properly attached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-roading where you will bedriving or check with lawenforcement people in the area.

. Be sure to get the necessarypermission if you will be onprivate land.

If you think you will need somemore ground clearance at the frontof your vehicle, you can remove thefront fascia lower air dam. The airdam is held in place by 2 bolts and10 snaps accessible fromunderneath the front fascia.

To remove the air dam:

1. Remove the 2 outboard air dambolts.

2. With a flat‐blade tool, disengagethe snaps.

3. After the bolts are removed andthe snaps are disengaged, pushforward on the air dam until itis free.

Notice: Operating your vehiclefor extended periods without thefront fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper airflow to the engine. Always besure to replace the front fascia airdam when you are finishedoff-road driving.

After off-roading, be sure to reinstallthe air dam:

1. Line up the snaps and push theair dam rearward to engage thesnaps.

2. Install the 2 outboard bolts.

Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than the seatbackscan be thrown forward duringa sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top ofthe seatbacks.

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forward andlow as possible.

There are some important things toremember about how to load yourvehicle.. The heaviest things should be

on the floor, forward of the rearaxle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.

. Be sure the load is properlysecured, so things are nottossed around.

You will find other importantinformation under Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23 and Tires onpage 10‑53.

Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can providewholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. Werecognize these concerns and urgeevery off-roader to follow thesebasic rules for protecting theenvironment:. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenspecially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving andobey all posted regulations.

. Avoid any driving practice thatcould damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking downtrees, or unnecessary drivingthrough streams or over softground.

. Always carry a litter bag andmake sure all refuse is removedfrom any campsite beforeleaving.

. Take extreme care with openfires (where permitted), campstoves, and lanterns.

. Never park your vehicle over drygrass or other combustiblematerials that could catch firefrom the heat of the vehicle'sexhaust system.



Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip,especially when going to a remotearea. Know the terrain and planyour route. Get accurate maps oftrails and terrain. Check to see ifthere are any blocked or closedroads.

It is also a good idea to travel withat least one other vehicle in casesomething happens to one of them.

For vehicles with a winch, be sure toread the winch instructions. In aremote area, a winch can be handyif you get stuck but you will want toknow how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving

It is a good idea to practice in anarea that is safe and close to homebefore you go into the wilderness.Off-roading requires some new anddifferent skills.

Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes need toconstantly sweep the terrain for

unexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire orengine sounds. Use your arms,hands, feet, and body to respond tovibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed. At higherspeeds:. You approach things faster and

have less time to react.. There is less time to scan the

terrain for obstacles.. The vehicle has more bounce

when driving over obstacles.. More braking distance is

needed, especially on anunpaved surface.

{ WARNING

When you are driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw you out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of position. This could cause youto lose control and crash. So,whether you are driving on or offthe road, you and yourpassengers should wear safetybelts.

Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you overmany different kinds of terrain. Befamiliar with the terrain and its manydifferent features.

Surface Conditions: Off-roadingsurfaces can be hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the vehicle's steering,acceleration, and braking in differentways. Depending on the surface,slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction,and longer braking distances canoccur.



Surface Obstacles: Unseen orhidden obstacles can be hazardous.A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump canstartle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles arehidden by grass, bushes, snow,or even the rise and fall of theterrain itself.

Some things to consider:. Is the path ahead clear?. Will the surface texture change

abruptly up ahead?. Does the travel take you uphill or

downhill?. Will you have to stop suddenly

or change direction quickly?

When driving over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip onthe steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands.

When driving over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, the wheels canleave the ground. If this happens,

even with one or two wheels,you cannot control the vehicle aswell or at all.

Because you will be on an unpavedsurface, it is especially important toavoid sudden acceleration, suddenturns, or sudden braking.

Off-roading requires a different kindof alertness from driving on pavedroads and highways. There are noroad signs, posted speed limits,or signal lights. Use good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.

Driving on Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgment andan understanding of what thevehicle can and cannot do. Thereare some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built thevehicle.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. If you drive upthem, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness, do not drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, decide ifit is too steep to climb, descend,or cross. Steepness can be hard tojudge. On a very small hill, forexample, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a smallchange in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. Ona large hill, the incline may getsteeper as you near the top, but youmight not see this because the crestof the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.



Consider this as you approach a hill:. Is there a constant incline,

or does the hill get sharplysteeper in places?

. Is there good traction on thehillside, or will the surface causetire slipping?

. Is there a straight path up ordown the hill so you will nothave to make turningmaneuvers?

. Are there obstructions on the hillthat can block your path, suchas boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

. What is beyond the hill? Is therea cliff, an embankment, adrop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

. Is the hill simply too rough?Steep hills often have ruts,gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are moresusceptible to the effects oferosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide it is safe to driveup the hill:. Use a low gear and get a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Get a smooth start up the hill

and try to maintain speed. Notusing more power than neededcan avoid spinning the wheels orsliding.

{ WARNING

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, andpossibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. Whendriving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

. Try to drive straight up the hill ifat all possible. If the path twistsand turns, you might want to findanother route.

. Ease up on the speed as youapproach the top of the hill.

. Attach a flag to the vehicle to bemore visible to approachingtraffic on trails or hills.

. Sound the horn as you approachthe top of the hill to let opposingtraffic know you are there.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible to oncoming traffic.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top (crest) of a hillat full speed can cause anaccident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff,or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.



If the vehicle stalls, or is about tostall, and you cannot make it upthe hill:. Push the brake pedal to stop the

vehicle and keep it from rollingbackwards and apply theparking brake.

. If the engine is still running, shiftthe transmission to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill inR (Reverse).

. If the engine has stoppedrunning, you need to restart it.With the brake pedal pressedand the parking brake stillapplied, shift the transmission toP (Park) and restart the engine.Then, shift to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill asstraight as possible inR (Reverse).

. While backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steeringwheel at the 12 o'clock positionso you can tell if the wheels are

straight and can maneuver asyou back down. It is best to backdown the hill with the wheelsstraight rather than in the left orright direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right willincrease the possibility of arollover.

Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, when going upa hill:. Never attempt to prevent a stall

by shifting into N (Neutral) torev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This will notwork. The vehicle can rollbackward very quickly and couldgo out of control.

. Never try to turn around if aboutto stall when going up a hill.If the hill is steep enough to stallthe vehicle, it is steep enough tocause it to roll over. If youcannot make it up the hill, backstraight down the hill.

If, after stalling, you try to backdown the hill and decide you justcannot do it, set the parking brake,put your transmission in P (Park),and turn off the engine. Leave thevehicle and go get some help. Exiton the uphill side and stay clear ofthe path the vehicle would take if itrolled downhill. Do not shift thetransfer case to Neutral when youleave the vehicle. Leave it insome gear.

{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toNeutral can cause your vehicle toroll even if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theNeutral position on the transfercase overrides the transmission.You or someone else could beinjured. If you are going to leaveyour vehicle, set the parkingbrake and shift the transmissionto P (Park). But do not shift thetransfer case to Neutral.



Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes youdownhill, consider:. How steep is the downhill? Will I

be able to maintain vehiclecontrol?

. What is the surface like?Smooth? Rough? Slippery?Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

. Are there hidden surfaceobstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

. What is at the bottom of the hill?Is there a hidden creek bank oreven a river bottom with largerocks?

If you decide you can go down a hillsafely, try to keep the vehicleheaded straight down. Use a lowgear so engine drag can help thebrakes so they do not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keepingthe vehicle under control at alltimes.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Things not to do when driving downa hill:. When driving downhill, avoid

turns that take you across theincline of the hill. A hill that is nottoo steep to drive down might betoo steep to drive across. Thevehicle could roll over.

. Never go downhill with thetransmission in N (Neutral),called free-wheeling. The brakeswill have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade.

Vehicles are much more likely tostall when going uphill, but if ithappens when going downhill:

1. Stop the vehicle by applying theregular brakes and apply theparking brake.

2. Shift to P (Park) and, while stillbraking, restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, releasethe parking brake, and drivestraight down.

4. If the engine will not start, getout and get help.



Driving Across an Incline

An off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. To decidewhether to try to drive across theincline, consider the following:

{ WARNING

Driving across an incline that istoo steep will make your vehicleroll over. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it.Find another route instead.

. A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. When goingstraight up or down a hill, thelength of the wheel base — thedistance from the front wheels tothe rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumbleend over end. But when drivingacross an incline, the narrowertrack width — the distance

between the left and rightwheels — might not prevent thevehicle from tilting and rollingover. Driving across an inclineputs more weight on the downhillwheels which could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline evenworse. If you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

For these reasons, carefullyconsider whether to try to driveacross an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline doesnot mean you have to drive it. Thelast vehicle to try it might haverolled over.

If you feel the vehicle starting toslide sideways, turn downhill. Thisshould help straighten out thevehicle and prevent the sideslipping. The best way to preventthis is to “walk the course” first, soyou know what the surface is likebefore driving it.



Stalling on an Incline

{ WARNING

Getting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

If the vehicle stalls when crossingan incline, be sure you, and anypassengers, get out on the uphillside, even if the door there is harderto open. If you get out on thedownhill side and the vehicle startsto roll over, you will be right inits path.

If you have to walk down the slope,stay out of the path the vehicle willtake if it does roll over.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow,or sand, the wheels do not get goodtraction. Acceleration is not asquick, turning is more difficult, andbraking distances are longer.

It is best to use a low gear when inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. In really deep mud,keep the vehicle moving so it doesnot get stuck.

When driving on sand, wheeltraction changes. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sanddunes, the tires will tend to sink intothe sand. This affects steering,accelerating, and braking. Drive at areduced speed and avoid sharpturns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer theworst tire traction. On thesesurfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, thetraction is so poor that you will havedifficulty accelerating. And, if thevehicle does get moving, poorsteering and difficult braking cancause it to slide out of control.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehiclecould fall through the ice and youand your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.



Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, andyou could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drivethrough rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,and flood waters demand extremecaution.

Find out how deep the water isbefore driving through it. Do not tryit if it is deep enough to cover thewheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe — you probably will not getthrough. Deep water can damagethe axle and other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, driveslowly through it. At faster speeds,water splashes on the ignitionsystem and the vehicle can stall.Stalling can also occur if you get thetailpipe under water. If the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be ableto start the engine. When goingthrough water, remember that whenthe brakes get wet, it might takelonger to stop. See Driving on WetRoads on page 9‑18.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,chassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

The vehicle requires more frequentservice due to off-road use. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule foradditional information.



Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑53.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.



. Keep your eyes moving — scanthe road ahead and to the sides.

. Check the rearview mirror andvehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or even

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalled car,accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.



Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑65 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑7.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑42.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.



If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking Your Vehicle to Get ItOut” later in this section.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑77.

Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, shift into Four‐Wheel High.For vehicles with StabiliTrak®, turnthe traction control part of thesystem off. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. Recovery

hooks can be used, if the vehiclehas them. If the vehicle does needto be towed out, see Towing theVehicle on page 10‑97.

Recovery Hooks

{ WARNING

These hooks, when used, areunder a lot of force. Always pullthe vehicle straight out. Never pullon the hooks at a sideways angle.The hooks could break off andyou or others could be injuredfrom the chain or cablesnapping back.



Notice: Never use recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle. Yourvehicle could be damaged and itwould not be covered bywarranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks atthe front of the vehicle, you can usethem if you are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver dooropen, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The tire andloading information label showsthe number of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑53 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑61 .

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.



4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400−750 (5x150) =650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity of

your vehicle. SeeTrailerTowing on page 9‑91 forimportant information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = (453 kg) (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)



Example 3

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rearedge of the driver door. Thelabel shows the size of yourvehicle's original tires and the

inflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof your vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel, andcargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.



The Certification/Tire label alsocontains important informationabout your Front Axle ReserveCapacity. See “What is front axlereserve capacity, and how do Icalculate it?” under Adding aSnow Plow or Similar Equipmenton page 9‑120 .

{ WARNING

In the case of a sudden stopor collision, things carried inthe bed of your truck couldshift forward and come intothe passenger area, injuringyou and others. If you putthings in the bed of your truck,you should make sure theyare properly secured.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change yourweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.



If you put things inside yourvehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving“under Off-Road Driving onpage 9‑7 .

Two-Tiered Loading

Depending on the model of yourpick‐up, an upper load platformcan be created by positioningthree or four 5 cm (2 inches) by15 cm (6 inches) wooden planksacross the width of the pickupbox. The planks must beinserted in the pickup boxdepressions.



When using this upper loadplatform, be sure the load issecurely tied down to prevent itfrom shifting. The load's centerof gravity should be positionedin a zone over the rear axle. Thezone is located in the areabetween the front of each wheelwell and the rear of each wheelwell. The center of gravity heightmust not extend above the topof the pickup box flareboard.

Any load that extends beyondthe vehicle's taillamp area mustbe properly marked according tolocal laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceedthe Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removableitems, you may need to put alimit on how many people youcarry inside your vehicle. Besure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install thenew equipment.

Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceedthe Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

* EquipmentMaximumWeight

Ladder Rackand Cargo

340 kg(750 lbs)

Cross Toolboxand Cargo

181 kg(400 lbs)

Side Boxesand Cargo

113 kg perside (250 lbsper side)

* The combined weight for allrail‐mounted equipment shouldnot exceed 454 kg (1,000 lbs).



Loading Points

A. Primary Load Points

B. Secondary Load Areas

C. Cargo Management OptionHoles

Structural members (A) and (B) areincluded in the pick-up box design.Additional accessories should usethese load points. Depending on theaccessory design, use a spacerunder the accessory at the loadpoints to remove gap. The holes forthe Cargo Management System (C)are not intended for attachment of

aftermarket equipment. Seewww.gmupfitter.com for additionalpick-up box load bearing structuralinformation.

Truck-Camper LoadingInformationA vehicle-specific Truck‐CamperLoading Information label isattached to the inside of thevehicle's glove box. This labelindicates if a slide-in campercan be carried, how much of aload the vehicle can carry, andhow to correctly spread out theload. It will help to match theright slide in camper to thevehicle.

Your dealer can help make agood vehicle-camper match andhelp determine the CargoWeight Rating (CWR).

When installing and loading aslide-in camper, check themanufacturer's instructions.

When carrying a slide-incamper, the total cargo load ofthe vehicle is the weight of thecamper, plus the following:. Everything added to the

camper after it left the factory. Everything in the camper. All the people inside

The CWR is the maximumweight of the load the vehiclecan carry. It does not include theweight of the people inside. But,use about 68 kg (150 lbs) foreach seat.

The total cargo load must not bemore than the vehicle's CWR.



Refer to the Truck-CamperLoading Information label in theglove box for dimensions A andB as shown in the followingillustration.

Use the rear edge of the loadfloor for measurement purposes.The recommended location forthe cargo center of gravity is atpoint C for the CWR. It is thepoint where the mass of abody is concentrated and,if suspended at that point, wouldbalance the front and rear.

Here is an example of propertruck and camper match:

A. Camper Center of Gravity

B. Recommended Center ofGravity Location Zone

When the truck is used to carrya slide‐in camper, the total cargoload of the truck consists of themanufacturer's camper weightfigure, the weight of installedadditional camper equipment notincluded in the manufacturer'scamper weight figure, the weight

of camper cargo, and the weightof passengers in the camper.The total cargo load should notexceed the truck's cargo weightrating, and the camper's centerof gravity (A) should fall withinthe truck's recommended centerof gravity zone (B) wheninstalled.

Any accessories or otherequipment that are added to thevehicle must be weighed. Then,subtract this extra weight fromthe CWR. This extra weight mayshorten the center of gravityzone of the vehicle.

If the slide-in camper and itsload weighs less than the CWR,the center of gravity zone foryour vehicle may be larger.

Secure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of the vehicle. When thetruck‐camper is loaded, drive toa scale and weigh on the front



and on the rear wheelsseparately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loadsshould not exceed either of thegross axle weight ratings(GAWR). The total axle loadsshould not exceed your vehicle'sgross vehicle weight rating(GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certificationlabel attached to the rear edgeof the driver door. See“Certification/Tire Label”under Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23 . If weight ratings areexceeded, move or removeitems to bring all weights belowthe ratings.

See your dealer for moreinformation on curb weights,cargo weights, Cargo WeightRating and the correct center ofgravity zone.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep your speed at 88 km/h(55mph) or less for the first805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑91 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.



Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalOn vehicles with this feature, youcan change the position of thethrottle and brake pedals.

No adjustment to the pedals can bemade when the vehicle is inR (Reverse) or while using cruisecontrol.

The control used to adjust thepedals is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controlsystem.

Press the bottom of the control tomove the pedals closer. Press thetop of the control to move thepedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you. Whiledriving, make only smalladjustments.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction which lets pedal settings besaved and recalled. See PowerSeat Adjustment on page 3‑3 formore information.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal must be applied.



A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑35

This position locks the ignition.It also locks the transmission onautomatic transmission vehicles.The key can be removed inLOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑66

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,

and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets things like the radioand the windshield wipers operatewhile the engine is off. Use thisposition if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

C (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when theengine is running. The transmissionis also unlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.



D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened and theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF, and the key is in theignition.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. OnStar® System (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped)

These features work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has the DURAMAX®

Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®

Diesel manual for more information.

If the vehicle is a Hybrid, see theHybrid Supplement for moreinformation.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as your engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear

damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch to theACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer‐ControlledCranking System is disabled toprevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When thishappens, hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter 5‐10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below−18°C or 0°F), it could beflooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor andholding it there as you hold thekey in START for up to15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.



Fast Idle SystemIf the vehicle has this feature it isavailable only with cruise control.The manual fast idle switch isoperated using the cruise controlbuttons located on the left hand sideof the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:. The park brake is set.. The brake pedal is not pressed.. The vehicle must not be moving

and the accelerator must not bepressed.

To control the fast idle:. To enable the Fast Idle System,

press and release the CruiseControl On/Off button andensure that the switch LED is lit.

. Press and release the CruiseControl Set switch. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 RPM.

When the fast idle is active theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay “FAST IDLE ON.”

One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:. Pressing the brake.. Selecting the Cruise Control

Cancel button.. Releasing the Parking Brake.. The transmission shifter is

moved out of P (Park) orN (Neutral).

. Selecting the Cruise Control On/Off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the Cruise Control Setswitch a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator greaterthan a quarter of the down.

. Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with anengine heater should be plugged inat least four hours before starting.An internal thermostat in theplug-end of the cord may existwhich will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax Diesel supplementfor more information.



To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord issecured to the EngineCompartment Fuse Blockwith a clip. Carefully remove thewire tie which bundles theelectrical plug. Do not cut theelectrical cord.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. With four-wheel drive,if the transfer case is in

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

N (Neutral), the vehicle will befree to roll, even if the shift leveris in P (Park). So, be sure thetransfer case is in a drivegear— not in N (Neutral). If youare pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9‑88.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 9‑66 for more information.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear— not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure yourvehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).



Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift your transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑38.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, then you will beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑92 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.



If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active FuelManagement™Vehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management™. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement™ indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑32 for more information onusing this display.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑42.



{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

{ WARNING

Four-wheel drive vehicles with thetransfer case in N (Neutral) willallow the vehicle to roll, even ifthe automatic transmission shiftlever is in P (Park). So, be surethe transfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral). Alwaysset the parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑38.

If pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑88.

AutomaticTransmissionIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Vehicles with an automatictransmission have an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Thisdisplay comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the ON/RUNposition.



There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed AutomaticTransmission

Heavy Duty 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission Shown (Light Duty

6‐Speed Similar)

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑48.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily. When parked on a hill,especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice anincrease in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park on page 9‑38 formore information.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑38. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑88.



{ WARNING

If you have Four-Wheel Drive, thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park)— ifthe transfer case is in Neutral. So,be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear, Two-Wheel Drive Highor Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low— not inNeutral. See Shifting Into Parkon page 9‑38.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑22.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

firmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.



D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,driving on steep hills, or for off-roaddriving. You might want to shift thetransmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑6.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. Adaptive shift controlscontinually compares key shiftparameters to pre-programmedideal shifts stored in thetransmissions computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when temperaturechanges. During this adaptive shiftcontrol process, shifting might feeldifferent as the transmissiondetermines the best settings.

When temperatures are very cold,the Allison Transmission andHydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission'sgear shifting could be delayedproviding more stable shifts until theengine warms up. Shifts could bemore noticeable with a coldtransmission. This difference inshifting is normal.



M (Manual Mode): This position isavailable on vehicles with theAllison Transmission or Hydra-Matic6-Speed transmission. It lets driversselect the range of gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions. If the vehicle has thisfeature, see “Range SelectionMode” under Manual Mode onpage 9‑48.

3 (Third): This position is also usedfor normal driving. It reduces vehiclespeed more than D (Drive) withoutusing the brakes. You might choose3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) whendriving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is lessshifting between gears and whengoing down a steep hill.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to usethe brakes off and on.

If you manually select 2 (Second) inan automatic transmission, thetransmission will start in secondgear. You can use this feature forreducing the speed of the rearwheels when you are trying to startthe vehicle from a stop on slipperyroad surfaces.

1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic4-Speed transmission this positionreduces vehicle speed even morethan 2 (Second) without using thebrakes. You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud. If theshift lever is put in 1 (First) while thevehicle is moving forward, thetransmission does not shift into firstgear until the vehicle is going slowlyenough.

For an Allison Transmission orHydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission,this position reduces vehicle speedwithout using the brakes. You canuse it for major/severe downgradesand off-road driving where thevehicle would otherwise acceleratedue to steepness of grade. Whenyou shift to 1 (First) it provides the

lowest gear appropriate to currentroad speed and continues todownshift as the vehicle slows,eventually downshifting to1 (First) gear.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.



Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode(Allison® Transmission orHydra-Matic® 6-SpeedTransmission)

The vehicle may have a RangeSelection Mode. The RangeSelection Mode helps control thevehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving down hill ortowing a trailer by letting you selecta desired range of gears.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons,located on the steering columnshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for current drivingconditions.

When M (Manual Mode) is selecteda number displays next to the M,indicating the current gear.

This number is the highest gear thatcan be used. However, the vehiclecan automatically shift to lowergears as it adjusts to drivingconditions. This means that allgears below that number areavailable. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle,but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used untilthe plus/minus button located on thesteering column lever is used tochange to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑49.

While using Range Selection Mode,Cruise Control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

If the vehicle has an exhaust brake,it can also be used, but will notautomatically downshift thetransmission. See Exhaust Brake inthe Duramax Diesel supplement.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.



Low Traction Mode

If your vehicle has the AllisonTransmission, or the Hydra-Matic6-Speed Automatic Transmission, ithas a Low Traction Mode that canassist in vehicle acceleration whenroad conditions are slippery, suchas with ice or snow. While thevehicle is at a stop, select thesecond gear range using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels after it detectswheel slip, preventing the tires fromspinning.

Tow/Haul Mode

Vehicles with an automatictransmission have a Tow/HaulMode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjuststhe transmission shift pattern toreduce shift cycling, providingincreased performance, vehiclecontrol, and transmission coolingwhen towing or hauling heavy loads.

The selector button is located on theend of the shift lever. Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and off by pressingthe button. When the tow/haul is on,a light on the instrument panelcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5‑29 for more information.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑107 formore information.



Tow/Haul Mode (AllisonTransmission or Hydra-Matic6-Speed AutomaticTransmission)

Vehicles with an AllisonTransmission or Hydra-Matic6-Speed Automatic Transmissionhave a Tow/Haul Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts the transmissionshift pattern to reduce shift cycling,providing increased performance,vehicle control, and transmissioncooling when towing or haulingheavy loads.

Turn the Tow/Haul Mode on and offby pressing the button, located onthe end of the shift lever. When thetow/haul is on, a light on theinstrument panel cluster willcome on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5‑29 for more information.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑107 formore information.

Grade Braking (AllisonTransmission or Hydra-Matic6-Speed AutomaticTransmission)

The Grade Braking shift modes canbe activated by pressing the buttonon the end of the shift control lever.While in Range Selection Mode,Grade Braking is deactivatedallowing the driver to select adesired range of gears.



Grade Braking is only active whilethe Tow/Haul Mode is selected andyou are not in the Range SelectionMode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode onpage 9‑48 for more information onthe Range Selection Mode. GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when drivingon downhill grades by automaticallyimplementing a shift schedule thatutilizes the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle. This reduceswear on the braking system andincreases control of the vehicle.Grade Braking monitors vehiclespeed, acceleration, engine torqueand brake pedal usage. Using thisinformation, it detects when thetruck is on a downhill grade and thedriver desires to slow the vehicle bypressing the brake.

This feature is active when theexhaust brake is enabled(if equipped).

Also see Towing Equipment onpage 9‑107 for more information.

Cruise Grade Braking (AllisonTransmission or Hydra-Matic6-Speed AutomaticTransmission)

Cruise Grade Braking assists whendriving on a downhill grade.It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftschedule that uses the engine andthe transmission to slow the vehicle.Cruise Grade Braking operateswhile Cruise Control is engaged inTow/Haul Mode to assist inmaintaining vehicle speed underloaded vehicle conditions. It utilizesvehicle acceleration and deviationfrom desired speed to determine the

correct gear for the operatingcondition. If vehicle speed is abovethe desired speed the transmissionwill downshift to slow the vehicle.If vehicle speed is near or belowdesired speed the trans will upshift,allowing vehicle speed to increase.

While in the Range Selection Mode,Cruise Grade Braking is notavailable.

This feature is active when theexhaust brake is enabled(if equipped).

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9‑48.



Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,you can send the engine's drivingpower to all four wheels for extratraction. To get the most satisfactionout of Four-Wheel Drive, you mustbe familiar with its operation.Read the following before usingFour-Wheel Drive. See theappropriate text for the transfer casein the vehicle.

Notice: Driving on clean, drypavement in Four-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive Low foran extended period of time maycause premature wear on thevehicle's powertrain. Do not driveon clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low forextended periods of time.

While driving on clean dry pavementand during tight turns, you mayexperience vibration in the steeringsystem.

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®,shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak®


Front Axle

The front axle engages anddisengages automatically when youshift the transfer case. Some delayfor the axle to engage or disengageis normal.

Manual Transfer Case

The transfer case shift lever is onthe floor to the right of the driver.Use this lever to shift into and out ofFour-Wheel Drive.



A Four-Wheel Drive indicator lightcomes on when you shift intofour-wheel drive and the front axleengages. See Four-Wheel-DriveLight on page 5‑29.

Some delay between shifting andwhen the indicator light comes on isnormal.

Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2m 4m 4n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑97 or Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑97.

Notice: Driving on clean, drypavement in four-wheel drive foran extended period of time cancause premature wear on thevehicle's powertrain. Do not driveon clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel Drive for extendedperiods of time.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need Four-Wheel Drive Low.It sends maximum power to allfour wheels. You might chooseFour-Wheel Drive Low if you aredriving off-road in deep sand, deepmud, deep snow, and while climbingor descending steep hills.



If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®,shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak®


A parking brake symbol is locatednext to the N (Neutral) symbol as areminder to set the parking brakebefore shifting the transfer case intoN (Neutral).

{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brakeon page 9‑66.

N (Neutral): Shift to this settingonly when the vehicle needs to betowed. See Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10‑97 or Towing theVehicle on page 10‑97.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.The front axle is not engaged intwo-wheel drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethis setting when you need extratraction, such as on snowy or icyroads or in most off-road situations.This setting also engages the frontaxle to help drive your vehicle. Thisis the best setting to use whenplowing snow.

You can shift from Two-Wheel DriveHigh to Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive High toTwo-Wheel Drive High while thevehicle is moving. In extremely coldweather, it may be necessary tostop or slow the vehicle to shift intoFour-Wheel Drive High.



When Using the ManualTransfer Case. Shifts into or out of Four-Wheel

Drive Low or N (Neutral) shouldbe made using quick motions toavoid excessive gear grinding.Shifting slowly may make it moredifficult to shift.

. You may notice that it is harderto shift when the vehicle is cold.After the vehicle warms up theshifting will return to normal.

. While in Four-Wheel High orFour-Wheel Drive Low youmay experience reduced fueleconomy.

. Avoid driving in Four-WheelDrive on clean, dry pavement.It may cause your tires to wearfaster, make the transfer caseharder to shift, and run noisier.

. If the transfer case shifter is inthe N (Neutral) position and youhave difficulty reaching theselected transfer case mode,with the engine running, shift the

transmission momentarily toD (Drive) and then back toN (Neutral). This will realign thegear teeth in the transfer caseand allow you to complete theshift.

Shifting from Two-Wheel DriveHigh to Four-Wheel Drive High. Shifts between Two-Wheel Drive

High and Four-Wheel Drive Highcan be made at any vehiclespeed.

. Shift the transfer case lever inone continuous motion intoeither the Four-Wheel Drive Highor Two-Wheel Drive Highposition.

. Shifting from Two-Wheel DriveHigh to Four-Wheel Drive Highwhile the vehicle is in motionmay require that moderate forcebe applied to the shift lever for afew seconds before Four-WheelDrive High can be engaged,especially in cold weather.

. In extremely cold weather, it maybe necessary to slow or stop thevehicle to shift into Four-WheelDrive High.

. While in Four-Wheel Drive High,the vehicle can be driven at anyposted legal speed limit.

Shifting In or Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

Notice: Shifting the transfer caseinto Four-Wheel-Drive Low whilemoving at speeds faster than5 km/h (3mph) may causepremature wear to the transfercase, and may cause the gears togrind. To avoid causingpremature wear, and grinding thegears, do not shift the transfercase into Four-Wheel-Drive Lowwhile the vehicle is moving fasterthan 5 km/h (3 mph).. Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive

Low should be done, if possible,with the vehicle at a slight roll,5 km/h (3 mph) or less.



. Shift the transmission intoN (Neutral).

{ WARNING


. Shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow with the vehicle at a stopmay be more difficult. You maybe unable to complete the shiftto Four-Wheel Drive Low, andthe transfer case will end up inN (Neutral). This is normal, andis a function of the gear teethaligning in the transfer case.When this happens, make surethe engine is on, shift thetransmission momentarily to

D (Drive) and back toN (Neutral), and then completethe transfer case shift.

. Shift the transfer case shift leverin one continuous motion intothe Four-Wheel Drive Lowposition.

. When in Four-Wheel Drive Lowdo not drive faster than72 km/h (45 mph). This willreduce wear and extend the lifeof your transfer case.

Shifting In or Out of Neutral

1. With the vehicle running and theengine at an idle, set the parkingbrake.

2. Place the transmission intoN (Neutral).

Shift the transfer case in onecontinuous motion into or out of theN (Neutral) position.

Electronic Transfer Case

The transfer case knob is locatednext to the steering column.

Use the dial to shift into and out offour-wheel drive.



Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2m 4m 4n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑97 or Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑97.

You can choose among four drivingsettings:

Indicator lights in the dial showwhich setting you are in. Theindicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition andone will stay on. If the lights do notcome on, you should take thevehicle to your dealer for service.An indicator light flashes whileshifting the transfer case andremains illuminated when the shift iscomplete. If for some reason the

transfer case cannot make arequested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations. Thefront axle is not engaged inTwo-Wheel Drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethe Four-Wheel Drive High positionwhen extra traction is needed, suchas on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting alsoengages the front axle to help drivethe vehicle. This is the best settingto use when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose Four-Wheel DriveLow while driving off-road in deepsand, deep mud, deep snow, andwhile climbing or descending steephills.



If the vehicle has StabiliTrak,®

shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak®


{ WARNING


N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑97 or Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑97 for more information.

If the SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVEmessage stays on, you should takethe vehicle to your dealer for

service. See “SERVICE 4WHEELDRIVE message” underTransmission Messages onpage 5‑48.

Shifting Into Two-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Two-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed, except whenshifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.See “Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low” for more information.

Shifting Into Four-WheelDrive Low

When Four-Wheel Drive Low isengaged, vehicle speed should bekept below 72 km/h (45 mph).Extended high-speed operation inFour-Wheel Drive Low may damageor shorten the life of the drivetrain.

To shift to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position, the ignition must be inON/RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). The preferred method

for shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow is to have the vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel Drive Lowposition. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Drive Low indicator lightto stop flashing and remain onbefore shifting the transmissionin gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the requestedmode indicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case. To help avoiddamaging the vehicle, always waitfor the mode indicator lights tostop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom transfer case N (Neutral) withthe engine running.



If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive Low positionwhen the vehicle is in gear and/ormoving, the Four-Wheel DriveLow indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift unless the vehicle is movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph) and thetransmission is in N (Neutral). After30 seconds the transfer case willshift to Four-Wheel DriveHigh mode.

Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Lowto Four-Wheel Drive High,or Two-Wheel Drive High, thevehicle must be stopped or movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral) and theignition in ON/RUN. The preferredmethod for shifting out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is to havethe vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to the

Four-Wheel Drive High orTwo-Wheel Drive High position. Youmust wait for the Four-Wheel DriveHigh or Two-Wheel Drive Highindicator light to stop flashing andremain on before shifting thetransmission into gear.


It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom transfer case N (Neutral) withthe engine running.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High,or Two-Wheel Drive High switchposition when the vehicle is in gearand/or moving, the Four-WheelDrive High, or Two-Wheel DriveHigh indicator light will flash for30 seconds but will not complete theshift unless your vehicle is movingless than 3 mph (5 km/h) and thetransmission is in N (Neutral).

Shifting into Neutral

To shift the transfer case toN (Neutral) do the following:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parkedso that it will not roll.

2. Set the parking brake and pressand hold the regular brakepedal. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑66 for more information.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).



5. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

6. Turn the transfer case dialclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theNeutral light starts blinking. Thiswill take at least 10 seconds.Then slowly release the dial tothe four low position. TheN (Neutral) light will come onwhen the transfer case shift toN (Neutral) is complete.

7. If the engine is running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse) forone second, then shift thetransmission to D (Drive) forone second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn theengine off.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).

10. Release the parking brake priorto moving the vehicle.

11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Shifting Out of Neutral

To shift the transfer case out ofN (Neutral) do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off, and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

3. Turn the transfer case dial toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.



5. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desiredposition.

Excessively shifting the transfercase into or out of the differentmodes may cause the transfer caseto enter the shift protection mode.This will protect the transfer casefrom possible damage and will onlyallow the transfer case to respond toone shift per 10 seconds. Thetransfer case may stay in this modefor up to three minutes.



Automatic Transfer Case

The transfer case knob is locatednext to the steering column.

Use the dial to shift into and out ofFour-Wheel Drive.

You can choose among five drivingsettings:

Indicator lights in the dial showwhich setting you are in. Theindicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition andone will stay on. If the lights do notcome on, you should take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

An indicator light will flash whileshifting the transfer case. It willremain illuminated when the shift iscomplete. If for some reason thetransfer case cannot make arequested shift, it will return to thelast chosen setting.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations. Thefront axle is not engaged inTwo-Wheel Drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable. Whendriving the vehicle in AUTO, thefront axle is engaged, but thevehicle's power is sent only to thefront and rear wheels automaticallybased on driving conditions. Drivingin this mode results in slightly lowerfuel economy than Two-WheelDrive High.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethe Four-Wheel Drive High positionwhen extra traction is needed, suchas on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting alsoengages the front axle to help drivethe vehicle. This is the best settingto use when plowing snow.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose Four-Wheel DriveLow if you are driving off-road indeep sand, deep mud, deep snow,and while climbing or descendingsteep hills.



If the vehicle has StabiliTrak,®

shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak®


{ WARNING


N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑97 or Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑97 for more information.

If the SERVICE 4WHEEL DRIVEmessage stays on, you should takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice. See “SERVICE 4WHEELDRIVE message” underTransmission Messages onpage 5‑48.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel DriveHigh or AUTO (AutomaticFour-Wheel Drive)

Turn the knob to the Four-WheelDrive High or AUTO position. Thiscan be done at any speed, exceptwhen shifting from Four-WheelDrive Low. The indicator light willflash while shifting. It will remain onwhen the shift is completed.

Shifting Into Two-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Two-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed, except whenshifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.The indicator light will flash whileshifting. It will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into Four-WheelDrive Low

When Four-Wheel Drive Low isengaged, vehicle speed should bekept below 72 km/h (45 mph).Extended high-speed operation inFour-Wheel Drive Low may damageor shorten the life of the drivetrain.

To shift to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position, the ignition must be inON/RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). The preferred methodfor shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow is to have the vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel Drive Lowposition. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Drive Low indicator lightto stop flashing and remain onbefore shifting the transmissioninto gear.




It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom N (Neutral) with the enginerunning.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive Low positionwhen the vehicle is in gear and/ormoving, the Four-Wheel Drive Lowindicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift unless the vehicle is movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph) and thetransmission is in N (Neutral). After30 seconds the transfer case willshift to Four-Wheel DriveHigh mode.

Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Lowto Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO orTwo-Wheel Drive High, the vehiclemust be stopped or moving lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral) and theignition in ON/RUN. The preferredmethod for shifting out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is to havethe vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob tothe Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTOor Two-Wheel Drive High position.You must wait for the Four-WheelDrive High, AUTO or Two-WheelDrive High indicator light to stopflashing and remain on beforeshifting the transmission into gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the requestedmode indicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case. To help avoiddamaging the vehicle, always wait

for the mode indicator lights tostop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom N (Neutral) with the enginerunning.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,or Two-Wheel Drive High switchposition when the vehicle is in gearand/or moving, the Four-WheelDrive High, AUTO or Two-WheelDrive High indicator light will flashfor 30 seconds but will not completethe shift unless the vehicle ismoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)and the transmission is inN (Neutral).



Shifting into Neutral

To shift the transfer case toN (Neutral) do the following:

1. Make sure the vehicle is parkedso that it will not roll.

2. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑66 formore information.

3. Shifting the transfer case intoN (Neutral) can be done with orwithout the engine running.Shifting without the enginerunning should be done with theignition in ON/RUN.

4. Put the transmission inN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

6. Turn the transfer case dialclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowly releasethe dial to the four low position.The N (Neutral) light will comeon when the transfer case shiftto N (Neutral) is complete.

7. If the engine is running, makesure that the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse) forone second, then shift thetransmission to D (Drive) forone second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn theengine off.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).



Shifting Out of Neutral

To shift out of N (Neutral) do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off, and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

3. Turn the transfer case dial toTwo-Wheel Drive High,Four-Wheel Drive High,or AUTO.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.





5. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desiredposition.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑28.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.



Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑27.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will flash and achime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑88.



Brake Assist (ExceptWith 4.3L V6 Engine)If this vehicle has StabiliTrak®, italso has a Brake Assist featuredesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates TheBrake Assist feature willautomatically disengage when the

brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)2500 and 3500 series vehicles withStabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure fora maximum of two seconds toensure that there is no rolling back.

The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two secondwindow. If the vehicle is equippedwith the Integrated Trailer BrakeControl (ITBC) system, HSA mayalso apply the trailer brakes. It willnot activate if the vehicle is in adrive gear and facing downhill or ifthe vehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse). There may besituations on minor hills (less than5% grade) with a loaded vehicle orwhile pulling a trailer where HSA willnot activate.



Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle may have a vehiclestability enhancement system calledStabiliTrak®. It is an advancedcomputer-controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before thevehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).In some cases, it may takeapproximately 3.2 km (2 miles) ofdriving before the system initializes.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.The cruise control can bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑71 for more information.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the StabiliTrak light alongwith one of the following messageswill be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC):TRACTION CONTROL OFF,SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICESTABILITRAK. If these DICmessages appear, make sure theStabiliTrak system has not beenturned off using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the vehicle off,wait 15 seconds, and turn it back onagain to reset the system. If any ofthese messages still appear on theDIC, the vehicle should be taken infor service. For more information onthe DIC messages, see RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑46.



The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The traction control disable button islocated on the instrument panelbelow the climate controls.

The Traction Control System (TCS)part of StabiliTrak can be turned offby pressing and releasing theStabiliTrak button. To disable bothTCS and StabiliTrak, press and hold5 until F illuminates and theappropriate DIC message displays.

TCS and StabiliTrak can be turnedon by pressing and releasing theStabiliTrak button if they are notautomatically shut off for any otherreason.

When TCS or StabiliTrak is turnedoff, the StabiliTrak light and theappropriate message will bedisplayed on the DIC to warn thedriver. The vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when tractioncontrol is off, but will not be able touse the engine speed managementsystem. See “Traction ControlOperation” next for moreinformation.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay still be heard as a result of thebrake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle is Stuckon page 9‑22.

When the transfer case is in 4LO,the stability system is automaticallydisabled, the StabiliTrak light comeson, and the STABILITRAK OFFmessage will appear on the DIC.Both traction control and StabiliTrakare automatically disabled in thiscondition.



Traction Control Operation

The traction control system is part ofthe StabiliTrak system. Tractioncontrol limits wheel spin by reducingengine power to the wheels (enginespeed management) and byapplying brakes to each individualwheel (brake-traction control) asnecessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started. It will activate andthe StabiliTrak light will flash if itsenses that any of the wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction while driving. If tractioncontrol is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portion oftraction control will work. Theengine speed management will bedisabled. In this mode, enginepower is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause thebrake-traction control to activateconstantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spin thewheel(s) excessively while theselights and messages aredisplayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, areduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑71.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer for service.

2500 and 3500 series vehicles withStabiliTrak have a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) on page 9‑119.

2500 and 3500 series vehicles withStabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature. See Hill Start Assist(HSA) on page 9‑67.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.



Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

For vehicles with cruise control, aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph)or more can be maintainedwithout keeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 40 km/h(25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol is turned off.

For vehicles with an Allison orHydra‐Matic 6‐speed automatictransmission, see “Grade Brakingand Cruise Grade Braking (AllisonTransmission) under Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑49 for anexplanation of how cruise controlinteracts with the Range SelectionMode, tow/haul and grade brakingsystems.

For vehicles with the StabiliTraksystem that begins to limit wheelspin while you are using cruisecontrol, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑68.When road conditions allow thecruise control to be safely usedagain, it can be turned back on.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator lightis on when cruise control is on andturns off when cruise control is off.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to resume to apreviously set speed, or press andhold to accelerate.

SET − (Set/Coast): Press to setthe speed and activate cruisecontrol or make the vehicledecelerate.



[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon after the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed.

{ WARNING

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.

1. PressI.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− button locatedon the steering wheel andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.



Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. While going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. While going downhill,you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehiclespeed down. When the brakes areapplied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press [ on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressI on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingtheI button or if the ignition isturned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph), and assists thedriver with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse). Thesensors on the rear bumper areused to detect the distance to anobject up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind thevehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in)off the ground.

{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or too close or farfrom the vehicle

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing, vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeps arecontinuous.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25.4 cm (10 in) off the groundand below tailgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.



The system can be disabled bypressing the rear park aid disablebutton located next to the radio.

The indicator light comes on andPARK ASSIST OFF displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC) toindicate that URPA is off; see ObjectDetection System Messages onpage 5‑45.

Notice: If you use URPA while thetailgate is lowered, it may notdetect an object behind yourvehicle, and you might back intothe object and damage yourvehicle. Always verify the tailgateis closed when using URPA orturn off URPA when driving withthe tailgate lowered.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: This messageoccurs if the driver disables thesystem.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see “Washing theVehicle” under Exterior Care onpage 10‑102.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objectwas hanging out of the tailgateduring the last drive cycle. Oncethe attached object is removedand the tailgate is raised, URPAwill return to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions are affectingsystem performance. Examplesof this are vibrations from ajackhammer or the compressionof air brakes on a very largetruck.



If the system is still disabled afterdriving forward at least 40 km/h(25 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)This vehicle may have a RearVision Camera (RVC) system. Readthis entire section before using it.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

If you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you could hit avehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

Vehicles without NavigationSystem

The Rear Vision Camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Whenthe key is in the ON/RUN positionand the driver shifts the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the video imageautomatically appears on the insiderearview mirror. Once the drivershifts out of R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically disappearsfrom the inside rearview mirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the RVC system, pressand holdz, located on the insiderearview mirror, until the leftindicator light turns off. The RVCdisplay is now disabled.

To turn the RVC system on again,press and holdz until the leftindicator light illuminates. The RVC



system display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirrornormally.

Vehicles with NavigationSystem

The RVC system is designed tohelp the driver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle. When the driver shiftsthe vehicle into R (Reverse), thevideo image automatically appearson the navigation screen. Once thedriver shifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,after a delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the RVC system on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the MENU button to enterthe configure menu options, thenpress the MENU hard key toselect Display or touch theDisplay screen button.

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen button ishighlighted the RVCsystem is on.

The delay after shifting out ofR (Reverse) is approximately10 seconds. The delay can becancelled by performing one of thefollowing:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting into P (Park).. Reaching a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

There is a message on the rearvision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety.”

Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theMENU button while the rear visioncamera image is on the display. Anyadjustments made will only affectthe rear vision camera screen.

] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the brightnessof the screen.



_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrast ofthe screen.

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the RVC. The UltrasonicRear Park Assist (URPA) systemmust not be disabled to use thecaution symbols. If URPA has beendisabled and the symbols havebeen turned on, the Rear ParkingAssist Symbols Unavailable errormessage may display. SeeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑74.

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

3. Press the MENU hard key toenter the configure menuoptions, then press the MENUhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The rear vision camera is located inthe bezel for the tailgate handle.



The camera uses a special lens.The distance of the image thatappears on the screen differs fromthe actual distance. The areadisplayed by the camera is limited.The camera does not displayobjects which are close to eithercorner of the bumper or under thebumper. The area displayed on thescreen can vary according tovehicle orientation or roadconditions.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera

B. Corner of the rear bumper

Disconnecting the Rear VisionCamera

The rear vision camera must bedisconnected if the tailgate needs tobe removed.

To disconnect the camera:

1. Remove the license plate.

2. Disconnect the cameraconnectors from the chassisharness, located behind thelicense plate, by pressing on therelease tab on each connector.

A. Chassis harness connector

B. Release tab

C. Camera connector

3. Plug the two exposed chassisharness connectors together toprevent contamination.



A. Chassis harness connector

B. Release tab

4. Feed the wiring harness throughthe pickup box, then plug thecamera connectors together toprevent contamination.

5. Remove the tailgate. SeeTailgate on page 2‑10 for moreinformation.

6. Reinstall the license plate.

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe rear vision camera and makesure the grommet and connectionare secure.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The RVC system might not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident. If this happens, theposition and mounting angle ofthe camera can change or thecamera can be affected. Be sureto have the camera and itsposition and mounting anglechecked at your dealer.

The RVC system display in therearview mirror may turn off or notappear as expected due to one ofthe following conditions. If thisoccurs the left indicator light on themirror will flash.. A slow flash may indicate a loss

of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate that thedisplay has been on for themaximum allowable time duringa reverse cycle, or the displayhas reached an OverTemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the video devicefrom high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal the device willreset and the green indicator willstop flashing.



During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash aslong as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)or until the conditions return tonormal.

Pressing and holdingz when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along with theleft indicator light.

FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax Diesel Supplement.

For Vehicles with gasoline engines,please read this.

Gasoline

Use of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The 8th digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine. The



VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑84. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑82.

Recommended FuelFor all vehicles except those withthe 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2),use regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heard

when using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code 2), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher. Youcan also use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, but the vehicle's accelerationcould be slightly reduced, and aslight audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard. If the octaneis less than 87, you might notice aheavy knocking noise when youdrive. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. Otherwise, you coulddamage the engine. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑83 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance might



be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑25. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanced

detergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.



However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emissioncontrol system could be affected.

The malfunction indicator lampmight turn on. If this occurs, returnto your dealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑82.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that canhelp you find E85 fuel. Thosestations that do have E85 should

have a label indicating ethanolcontent. Do not use the fuel if theethanol content is greater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798. Bydefinition, this means that fuellabeled E85 will have an ethanolcontent between 70% and 85%.Filling the fuel tank with fuelmixtures that do not meet ASTMspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

To ensure quick starts in thewintertime, the E85 fuel must beformulated properly for your climateaccording to ASTM specificationD 5798. If you have trouble startingon E85, it could be because the E85fuel is not properly formulated foryour climate. If this happens,switching to gasoline or addinggasoline to the fuel tank canimprove starting. For good startingand heater efficiency below 0°C(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tankshould contain no more than 70%ethanol. It is best not to alternate



repeatedly between gasoline andE85. If you do switch fuels, it isrecommended that you add asmuch fuel as possible — do not addless than 11 L (three gallons) whenrefueling. You should drive thevehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least 11 km (seven miles) toallow the vehicle to adapt to thechange in ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per gallon thangasoline, so you will need to refillthe fuel tank more often when usingE85 than when you are usinggasoline. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑85.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It can

corrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Filling the TankIf the vehicle has a Duramax dieselengine, see the Duramax dieselsupplement for more information.

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This is

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

against the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle. If thevehicle has E85 fuel capability, thefuel cap will be yellow and state that



E85 or gasoline can be used. SeeFuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑84.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

If the vehicle is a dual fuel tankchassis cab model, and it runs outof fuel, refuel the front fuel tank firstto ensure a quick restart.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. See“Washing the Vehicle” in ExteriorCleaning.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. It will requiremore effort to turn the fuel cap onthe last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑25.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑45 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type fuel cap might not fitproperly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑25.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑97. For information ontowing the vehicle behind another



vehicle such as a motorhome, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑97.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Pulling a Trailer

Important points for pulling a trailer:. There are many different laws,

including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering.Make sure the rig will be legal,not only where you live but alsowhere you will be driving.A good source for thisinformation can be state orprovincial police.

. Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” under TowingEquipment on page 9‑107.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle, or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

Important considerations that haveto do with weight:. Weight of the trailer. Weight of the trailer tongue. Weight on the vehicle's tires. Weight of the trailering

combination

Driving with a Trailer

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

. Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

. Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑42.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.

Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentpanel will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The Tow/Haul Mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑49.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)

for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑22.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.



3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive,be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear and not in N (Neutral).

6. Release the brake pedal.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehiclecan roll.

If the engine has been leftrunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when on fairlylevel ground, use the steps thatfollow.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Always put the shift lever fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If the transfer case on afour-wheel-drive vehicle is inN (Neutral), the vehicle will befree to roll, even if the shift leveris in P (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.




Do not tow a trailer during break‐in.See New Vehicle Break-In onpage 9‑32 for more information.

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell or even at all. The driver andpassengers could be seriouslyinjured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” later in thissection.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that of

your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can depend onany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.

Trailer weight rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver but all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers, and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from thetrailer weight rating.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Weights listed apply for conventional trailers and fifth-wheel trailers unless otherwise noted.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)

4.3LV6 (c) 3.23 2 177 kg (4,800 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)

4.3LV6 — With AutomaticTransmission (c)

3.73 2 449 kg (5,400 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)

4.8LV8 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)

4.8LV8 3.73 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

5.3L LMG V8 3.08 2 994 kg (6,600 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

5.3L LMG V8, K5L HDCooling Pkg

3.08 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)

5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling PkgConventional Trailer 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling PkgFifth-Wheel Trailer

3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)




1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)

4.3LV6 (c) 3.23 1 996 kg (4,400 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)

4.8LV8 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)

4.8LV8 3.73 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 3.08 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.08 3 130 kg (6,900 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD CoolingPkg — Conventional Trailer

3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD CoolingPkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer

3.42 4 173 kg (9,200 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)


3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)


3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

6.2LV8 NHT Max TraileringPkg — Conventional Trailer 3.73 4 853 kg (10,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

6.2LV8 NHT Max TraileringPkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer

3.73 4 627 kg (10,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)




1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)

4.8LV8 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)

4.8LV8 3.73 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 (LMG) 3.08 2 767 kg (6,100 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

5.3LV8 (LMG) K5L HDCooling Pkg

3.08 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD CoolingPkg (XFE)

3.08 3 175 kg (7,000 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)


6.2LV8 3.42 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)


6.2LV8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 3.73 4 808 kg (10,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)

4.3LV6 (c) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)

4.3LV6 (c) 3.73 2 359 kg (5,200 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)

4.8LV8 (c) 3.23 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)

4.8LV8 3.73 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)





5.3LV8 3.42 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)


3.42 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD CoolingPkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 3.42 3 992 kg (8,800 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)

5.3LV8 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)



3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)


3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)

4.3LV6 (c) 3.73 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)

4.8LV8 (c) 3.42 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 (c) 3.08 2 903 kg (6,400 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)






3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)


3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)

4.8LV8 (c) 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 (c) 3.08 2 767 kg (6,100 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (c) 3.08 3 084 kg (6,800 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)



3.42 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)


3.42 4 037 kg (8,900 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

6.2LV8 NHT Max TraileringPkg — Conventional Trailer

3.73 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

6.2LV8 NHT Max TraileringPkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer

3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)




1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)

4.8LV8 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)



6.2LV8 3.42 2 903 kg (6,400 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)


6.2LV8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 3.73 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)

4.3LV6 (c) 3.73 2 223 kg (4,900 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)

4.8LV8 (c) 3.42 2 631 kg (5,800 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)

5.3LV8 (c) 3.08 2 858 kg (6,300 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)



3.42 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)


3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)




1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)

5.3LV8 (c) 3.08 2 631 kg (5,800 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (c) 3.08 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)

5.3LV8 K5L HD CoolingPkg — Conventional Trailer 3.42 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)


3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)

2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 — Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)

6.0LV8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 486 kg (14,300 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)

2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)






2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 627 kg (10,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

6.0LV8 — Payload PerformancePkg (UB7)

3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)






2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)






2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



3500 Series 2WD Regular Cab (e)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Conventional Trailer

4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 577 kg (14,500 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)

6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)


3500 Series 2WD Extended Cab (e)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)


4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Fifth-Wheel Trailer

4.10 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)




6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 128kg (9,100 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)


3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box (e)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 309kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)


6.0LV8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)

3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box (e)



4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)


4.10 6 305 kg (13,900 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)



3500 Series 4WD Regular Cab (e)



4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)





4.10 6 441 kg (14,200 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)



3500 Series 4WD Extended Cab (e)



4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)


4.10 6 214 kg (13,700 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)



3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box (e)

6.0LV8 3.73 4 173 kg (9,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)



3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box (e)






4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)


4.10 6 169 kg (13,600 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)



(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.(b) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 680 kg(1,500 lbs) maximum.(c) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.(d) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1 361 kg(3,000 lbs) maximum.(e) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1 587 kg(3,500 lbs) maximum.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑4 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. TheGross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the

vehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers and cargo in the vehiclereduce the amount of tongue weight



the vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. See “ Vehicle Load Limits”for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.

Trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 to 15 percent and fifth-wheel orgooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailerweight (B) up to the maximums for vehicle series and hitch type shown here:

Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lbs)

2500HD/3500 Weight Carrying 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)

2500HD/3500 Weight Distributing 680 kg (1,500 lbs)

1500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 680 kg (1,500 lbs)

2500HD Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1134 kg (2,500 lbs)

3500 Single RearWheels Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 360 kg (3,000 lbs)

3500 Dual RearWheels

Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 587 kg (3,500 lbs)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue or kingpin weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceedthe GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross



Axle Weight Rating). See “TotalWeight on the Vehicle's Tires” laterin this section for more information.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification Tire labelon the drivers door or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23 for moreinformation. Make sure not toexceed the GVWR limit for thevehicle, or the RGAWR, with the towvehicle and trailer fully loadedfor the trip including the weight ofthe trailer tongue. If using aweight-distributing hitch, make surenot to exceed the RGAWR beforeapplying the weight distributionspring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer doesnot exceed any of its weightratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Trailer Weight Rating, or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the tow vehicle andtrailer combination, fully loaded forthe trip, getting individual weightsfor each of these items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Mostsmall-to-medium trailers can betowed with a weight-carryinghitch which simply features acoupler latched to the hitch ball.

Larger trailers may require aweight-distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight among thetwo vehicle and trailer axles.Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitchesmay also be used. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” under TrailerTowing on page 9‑91 for ratinglimits with various hitch types.

If a step-bumper hitch will be used,the bumper could be damaged insharp turns. Make sure thereis ample room when turning to avoidcontact between the trailer and thebumper.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.



Weight‐Distributing HitchAdjustment

A. Body to Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the spring bars should beadjusted so the distance (A) is thesame after coupling the trailer to thetow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.

Fifth-Wheel and GooseneckTrailering

Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailerscan be used with many pickupmodels. These trailers place alarger percentage of the weight(kingpin weight) on the tow vehiclethan conventional trailers. Makesure this weight does not cause thevehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.

Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpinweight should be 15 to 25 percent ofthe trailer weight up to the maximumamount specified in the traileringchart for the vehicle. See “Weight ofthe Trailer” under Trailer Towing onpage 9‑91 for more information.

The hitch should be located in thepickup bed so that its centerline isover or slightly in front of the rearaxle. Take care that it is not so farforward that it will contact the backof the cab in sharp turns. This isespecially important for short boxpickups. Trailer pin box extensionsand sliding fifth-wheel hitchassemblies can help this condition.

There should be at least six inchesof clearance between the top of thepickup box and the bottom of thetrailer shelf that extends overthe box.

Make sure the hitch is attached tothe tow vehicle frame rails. Do notuse the pickup box for support.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. If the trailer beingtowed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lbs) with a factory-installedstep bumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper; otherwise, safetychains should be attached to holeson the trailer hitch platform. Always



leave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

If the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak, the trailer cannot tapinto the vehicle's hydraulic brakesystem.

The trailer brake system can tapinto the vehicle's hydraulic brakesystem only if:. The trailer parts can withstand

20 650 kPa (3,000 psi) ofpressure.

. The trailer's brake system willuse less than 0.3 cc (0.02 cubicinch) of fluid from the vehicle'smaster cylinder. Otherwise, bothbraking systems will not workwell or at all.

If everything checks out this far,make the brake tap at the port onthe master cylinder that sends thefluid to the rear brakes. Use onlysteel brake tubing to make the tap.

Auxiliary Battery

The auxiliary battery provision canbe used to supply electrical powerto additional equipment that may beadded, such as a slide-in camper.If the vehicle has this provision, thisrelay will be located on the driverside of the vehicle, next to theunderhood electrical center.

Be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withany electrical equipment that isinstalled.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not use equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperagerating for the auxiliary batteryprovision.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The vehicle is equipped with one ofthe following wiring harnesses fortowing a trailer or hauling a slide-incamper.

Basic Trailer Wiring

All regular, extended cab and crewcab pickups have a seven‐wiretrailer towing harness.

For vehicles not equipped withheavy duty trailering, the harness issecured to the vehicle's framebehind the spare tire mount. Theharness requires the installation of atrailer connector, which is availablethrough your dealer.



If towing a light‐duty trailer with astandard four‐way round pinconnector, an adapter is availablefrom your dealer.

Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring HarnessPackage

For vehicles equipped with heavyduty trailering, the harness isconnected to a bracket on the hitchplatform. The seven-wire harnesscontains the following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal

. Brown: Taillamps

. White: Ground

. Light Green: Back-up Lamps

. Red: Battery Feed*

. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits areinstalled in the underhood electricalcenter, but the wires are notconnected. They should beconnected by your dealer or aqualified service center. The fuseand wire for the ITBC is factoryinstalled and connected if thevehicle is equipped with an ITBC.The fuse for the battery feed is notrequired if the vehicle has anauxiliary battery. If the vehicle doesnot have an auxiliary battery, haveyour dealer or authorized servicecenter install the required fuse.

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the Tow/Haul Modebutton, if equipped, located at theend of the shift lever. This will boostthe vehicle system voltage andproperly charge the battery. If thetrailer is too light for Tow/HaulMode, or the vehicle is not equippedwith Tow/Haul, turn on theheadlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer WiringPackage

The seven-wire camper harness islocated under the front edge of thepickup box on the driver side of thevehicle, attached to the framebracket. A connector must be addedto the wiring harness whichconnects to the camper.



The harness contains the followingcamper/trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. White: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake If the vehicle is equipped with the

“Heavy-Duty Trailering” option,please refer to “Heavy-Duty TrailerWiring Package” earlier in thissection.

When the camper-wiring harness isordered without the heavy-dutytrailering package, an eight-wireharness with a seven-pin connectoris located at the rear of the vehicleand is tied to the vehicle's frame.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller. The instrument panelcontains blunt cut wires behind thesteering column for the trailer brakecontroller. The harness contains thefollowing wires:. Dark Blue: Brake Signal to

Trailer Connector. Red/Black: Battery. Light Blue/White: Brake Switch. White: Ground

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.



If the vehicle is equipped with anIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) System, the blunt cuts exist,but are not connected further in theharness. If an aftermarket trailerbrake controller is installed, theITBC must be disconnected. Do notpower both ITBC and aftermarketcontrollers to control the trailerbrakes at the same time.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off theTow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when theTow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑49 for moreinformation.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing on page 9‑91. Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing driving conditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or a

large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with notrailer at all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded mayresult in unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.



Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor electric trailer brakes.

This symbol is located on the TrailerBrake Control Panel on vehicleswith an Integrated Trailer BrakeControl system. The power output tothe trailer brakes is based on theamount of brake pressure beingapplied by the vehicle’s brakesystem. This available power outputto the trailer brakes can be adjustedto a wide range of traileringsituations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,and StabiliTrak (if equipped)systems. In trailering conditions thatcause the vehicle’s antilock brake orStabiliTrak systems to activate,power sent to the trailer's brakes willbe automatically adjusted tominimize trailer wheel lock-up. Thisdoes not imply that the trailer hasStabiliTrak.

2500 and 3500 series vehicles withStabiliTrak have a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) on page 9‑119.

2500 and 3500 series vehicles withStabiliTrak have a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature. See Hill Start Assist(HSA) on page 9‑67.

If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,or StabiliTrak systems are notfunctioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not be fully functionalor may not function at all. Make sureall of these systems are fullyoperational to ensure fullfunctionality of the ITBC system.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition off willalso turn off the ITBC system. TheITBC system is fully functional onlywhen the ignition is in ON orin RUN.



The ITBC system can only be usedwith trailers with electric brakes.

{ WARNING

Connecting a trailer that is notcompatible with the ITBC systemmay result in reduced or completeloss of trailer braking. There maybe an increase in stoppingdistance or trailer instability whichcould result in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle, trailer,or other property. An aftermarketcontroller may be available foruse with trailers with surge, air,or electric‐over‐hydraulic trailerbrake systems. To determine thetype of brakes on the trailer andthe availability of controllers,check with your trailermanufacturer or dealer.

When trailering, make sure of thefollowing:. The ITBC system is used only

with trailers that are equippedwith electric brakes.

. All applicable local and federallaws and regulations arefollowed.

. All electrical and mechanicalconnections to the trailer aremade correctly.

. The trailer’s brakes are in properworking condition.

. The trailer and vehicle areproperly loaded for the towingcondition.

The ITBC system is afactory-installed item. Out‐of‐factoryinstallation of this system should notbe attempted. GM is not responsiblefor warranty or performance of thesystem resulting from out‐of‐factoryinstallation.

Trailer Brake Control Panel

A. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons

The ITBC system has a controlpanel located on the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringcolumn. See Instrument Panel(Base/Uplevel Version) onpage 1‑2 or Instrument Panel(Premium Version) on page 1‑6 .



The control panel allows adjustmentto the amount of output, referred toas trailer gain, available to theelectric trailer brakes and allowsmanual application of the trailerbrakes. The Trailer Brake ControlPanel is used along with the TrailerBrake Display Page on the DIC toadjust and display power output tothe trailer brakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC system displaysmessages on the vehicle’s DriverInformation Center (DIC). See BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑41for more information.

The display page indicates TrailerGain setting, power output to theelectric trailer brakes, trailerconnection, and system operationalstatus.

The Trailer Brake Display Page canbe displayed by performing any ofthe following actions:. Scrolling through the DIC menu

pages using the odometer tripstem or the DIC VehicleInformation button (if equipped).

. Pressing a Trailer Gainbutton—If the Trailer BrakeDisplay Page is not currentlydisplayed, pressing a TrailerGain button will first recall thecurrent Trailer Gain setting. Afterthe Trailer Brake Display Page isdisplayed, each press andrelease of the gain buttons willthen cause the Trailer Gainsetting to change.

. Activating the Manual TrailerBrake Apply lever.

. Connecting a trailer equippedwith electric trailer brakes.

All DIC warning and servicemessages must first beacknowledged by the driver bypressing the odometer trip stem orthe DIC Vehicle Information button(if equipped) before the TrailerBrake Display Page can bedisplayed and Trailer Gain can beadjusted.

TRAILER GAIN: This setting isdisplayed any time the Trailer BrakeDisplay Page is active. This settingcan be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0with either a trailer connected ordisconnected. To adjust the TrailerGain, press one of the Trailer Gainadjustment buttons located on theTrailer Brake Control Panel. Pressand hold a gain button to cause theTrailer Gain to continuously adjust.To turn the output to the trailer off,adjust the Trailer Gain setting to0.0 (zero).

0.0 (zero) gain is the factory defaultsetting. To properly adjust trailergain, see “Trailer Gain AdjustmentProcedure” later in this section.



TRAILER OUTPUT: This isdisplayed any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputto the electric brakes is based onthe amount of vehicle brakingpresent and relative to the TrailerGain setting. Output is displayedfrom 0 to 10 bars for each gainsetting.

On vehicles with Trailer SwayControl (TSC) or Hill Start Assist(HSA), output to the electric trailerbrakes may be displayed when thesystems are active. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) on page 9‑119and Hill Start Assist (HSA) onpage 9‑67.

The Trailer Output willindicate “- - - - - -” on the TrailerBrake Display Page whenever thefollowing occur:. No trailer is connected. A trailer without electric brakes

is connected (no DIC messageis displayed)

. A trailer with electric brakeshas become disconnected(a CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also be displayedon the DIC)

. There is a fault present in thewiring to the electric trailerbrakes (a CHECK TRAILERWIRING message will also bedisplayed on the DIC)

. There is a fault in the ITBCsystem (a SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message willalso be displayed in the DIC)

Manual Trailer Brake Apply

The Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever is located on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel and is used to applythe trailer’s electric brakesindependent of the vehicle’s brakes.This lever is used in the Trailer GainAdjustment Procedure to properlyadjust the power output to the trailerbrakes. Sliding the lever to the leftwill apply only the trailer brakes.The power output to the trailer isindicated in the Trailer Brake

Display Page on the DIC. If thevehicle’s service brakes are appliedwhile using the Manual Trailer BrakeApply Lever, the trailer output powerwill be the greater of the two.

The trailer's and the vehicle's brakelamps will come on when eithervehicle braking or manual trailerbrakes are applied.

Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and mustbe adjusted any time vehicleloading, trailer loading, or roadsurface conditions change.

Setting the Trailer Gain properly isneeded for the best trailer stoppingperformance. A trailer that isover-gained may result in lockedtrailer brakes. A trailer that isunder-gained may result in notenough trailer braking. Both of theseconditions may result in poorerstopping and stability of the vehicleand trailer.



Use the following procedure tocorrectly adjust Trailer Gain for eachtowing condition:

1. Make sure the trailer brakes arein proper working condition.

2. Connect a properly loaded trailerto the vehicle and make allnecessary mechanical andelectrical connections. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23 for more information.

3. After the electrical connection ismade to a trailer equipped withelectric brakes:. A TRAILER CONNECTED

message will be brieflydisplayed on the DIC.

. The Trailer Brake DisplayPage will appear on theDIC showing TRAILERGAIN and TRAILEROUTPUT.

. In the Trailer Output displayon the DIC, “- - - - - -” willdisappear if there is noerror present. Connecting atrailer without electricbrakes will not clear the sixdashed lines.

4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by usingthe gain adjustment (+ / -)buttons on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel.

5. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level road surfacerepresentative of the towingcondition and free of traffic atabout 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) and fully apply theManual Trailer Brake ApplyLever.

Adjusting trailer gain at speedslower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) may result in anincorrect gain setting.

6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to justbelow the point of trailer wheellock-up, indicated by trailerwheel squeal or tire smoke whena trailer wheel locks.

Trailer wheel lock-up may notoccur if towing a heavily loadedtrailer. In this case, adjust theTrailer Gain to the highestallowable setting for the towingcondition.

7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any timevehicle loading, trailer loading orroad surface conditions changeor if trailer wheel lock-up isnoticed at any time while towing.



Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages

In addition to displaying TRAILERGAIN and TRAILER OUTPUTthrough the DIC, trailer connectionand ITBC system status aredisplayed on the DIC.

TRAILER CONNECTED: Thismessage will be briefly displayedwhen a trailer with electric brakes isfirst connected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about 10 seconds. The driver canalso acknowledge this messagebefore it automatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will be displayed if:

1. The ITBC system firstdetermines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automatically turnoff in about 30 seconds. Thismessage will also turn off if the

driver acknowledges thismessage or if the trailer harnessis re-connected.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue until theignition is turned off. Thismessage will also turn off if thedriver acknowledges thismessage or if the trailer harnessis re-connected.

2. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the electric trailerbrakes. This message willcontinue as long as there is anelectrical fault in the trailerwiring. This message will alsoturn off if the driveracknowledges this message.

To determine if the electrical fault ison the vehicle side or trailer side ofthe trailer wiring harnessconnection, do the following:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition off.

3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage re-appears, theelectrical fault is on thevehicle side.

If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage only re-appears whenconnecting the trailer wiringharness to the vehicle, theelectrical fault is on thetrailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM: This message will bedisplayed when there is a problemwith the ITBC system. If thismessage persists over multipleignition cycles, there is a problemwith the ITBC system. Take thevehicle to an authorized GM dealerto have the ITBC system diagnosedand repaired.



If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message isdisplayed while driving the vehicle,power is no longer available to thetrailer brakes. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check thewiring connection to the trailer andturn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.

An authorized GM dealer may beable to diagnose and repairproblems with the trailer. However,any diagnosis and repair of thetrailer is not covered under thevehicle warranty. Please contactyour trailer dealer for assistancewith trailer repairs and trailerwarranty information.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

2500 and 3500 series vehicles withStabiliTrak have a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature. If the vehicleis towing a trailer and the systemdetects that the trailer is swaying,the vehicle's brakes are appliedwithout the driver pressing the brakepedal. If the vehicle is equipped withthe Integrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, StabiliTrak may alsoapply the trailer brakes. The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will flash onthe instrument panel cluster to notifythe driver to reduce speed. If thetrailer continues to sway, StabiliTrakwill reduce engine torque to helpslow the vehicle.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle'sperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 formore information.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle battery, even if the vehicle isnot operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑44 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑44.



Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar EquipmentBefore installing a snow plow on thevehicle, here are some things youneed to know:

Notice: If your vehicle does nothave the snow plow preppackage, adding a plow candamage your vehicle, and therepairs would not be covered bywarranty. Unless your vehicle wasbuilt to carry a snow plow, do notadd one to your vehicle. If yourvehicle has the snow plow preppackage, called RPO VYU, thenthe payload your vehicle cancarry will be reduced when asnow plow is installed. Yourvehicle can be damaged if eitherthe front or rear axle ratings orthe Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)are exceeded.

Some vehicles are built with aspecial snow plow prep package,called RPO VYU. If your vehicle hasthis option, you can add a plow to it,provided certain weights, such as

the weights on the vehicle'saxles and the Gross VehicleWeight (GVW), are not exceeded.

The plow the vehicle can carrydepends on many things, such as:. The options the vehicle came

with, and the weight of thoseoptions.

. The weight and number ofpassengers you intend to carry.

. The weight of items added to thevehicle, like a tool box ortruck cap.

. The total weight of anyadditional cargo you intend tocarry.

Say, for example, you have a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow. The total weightof all occupants and cargo insidethe cab should not exceed 135 kg(300 lb). This means that you mayonly be able to carry one passenger.But, even this may be too much ifyou have got other equipmentalready adding to the weight of thevehicle.

Here are some guidelines for safelycarrying a snow plow on the vehicle:. Make sure the weight on the

front and rear axles does notexceed the axle rating for each.

. For the front axle, if more cargoor passengers must be carried,appropriate counter ballast mustbe installed rear of the rear axle.Counter ballast must be properlysecured so it will not moveduring driving.

. Follow the snow plowmanufacturer'srecommendations regarding rearballast. Rear ballast may berequired to ensure a proper frontand rear weight distribution ratio,even though the actual weight atthe front axle may be less thanthe front axle rating.



. The snow plow manufacturer orinstaller can assist you indetermining the amount of rearballast required, to help makesure the snowplow/vehiclecombination does not exceedthe GVW rating, the front andrear axle ratings, and the frontand rear weight distribution ratio.

. The total vehicle must notexceed the GVW rating.

Front axle reserve capacity is thedifference between the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) and the frontaxle weight of the vehicle with fullfuel and passengers. Basically, it isthe amount of weight that can beadded to the front axle beforereaching the front GAWR.

The front axle reserve capacity forthe vehicle can be found in thelower right corner of theCertification/Tire label, as shown.

United States

Canada

In order to calculate the amount ofweight any front accessory, such asa snow plow, is adding to the frontaxle, use the following formula:

(W x (A +W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight theaccessory is adding to thefront axle.



Where:W = Weight of added accessoryA = Distance that the accessoryis in front of the front axleW.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

For example, adding a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow actually addsmore than 318 kg (700 lbs) to thefront axle. Using the formula, if thesnow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front ofthe front axle and the wheel base is305 cm (10 ft), then:

W = 318 kg (700 lb)A = 122 cm (4 ft)W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)

(W x (A +W.B.))/W.B. =(700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 445 kg (980 lbs)

So, if the front axle reserve capacityis more than 445 kg (980 lbs), youcould add the snow plow withoutexceeding the front GAWR.

You can add heavier equipment onthe front of the vehicle if youcompensate for it by carrying fewerpassengers, less cargo, or bypositioning cargo toward the rear.This has the effect of reducing theload on the front. However, the frontGAWR, rear GAWR, and the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) mustnever be exceeded.

{ WARNING

On some vehicles that havecertain front mounted equipment,such as a snow plow, it may bepossible to load the front axle tothe front gross axle weight rating(GAWR) but not have enoughweight on the rear axle to haveproper braking performance.If your brakes can not workproperly, you could have a crash.To help your brakes work properlywhen a snow plow is installed,always follow the snow plow

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

manufacturer or installer'srecommendation for rear ballastto ensure a proper front and rearweight distribution ratio, eventhough the actual front weightmay be less than the frontGAWR, and the total vehicleweight is less than the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR).Maintaining a proper front andrear weight distribution ratio isnecessary to provide properbraking performance.



Total vehicle reserve capacity is thedifference between the GVWR andthe weight of the truck with full fueland passengers. It is the amount ofweight that can be added to thevehicle before reaching the GVWR.Keep in mind that reserve capacitynumbers are intended as a guidewhen selecting the amount ofequipment or cargo the truck cancarry. If unsure of the vehicle's front,rear, or total weight, go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle. Yourdealer can also help with this.

The total vehicle reserve capacityfor the vehicle can be foundin the lower right corner of theCertification/Tire label as shownpreviously.

See your dealer for additionaladvice and information about usinga snow plow on the vehicle. Also,see Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23.

Emergency Roof LampProvisions

Vehicles with the RPO VYU snowplow prep package also have anemergency roof lamp provisionpackage, RPO TRW. Wiring for theemergency roof lamp is providedabove the overhead console. SeeAuxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp onpage 6‑6 for switch location.

Pickup Conversion toChassis CabWe are aware that some vehicleowners might consider having thepickup box removed and acommercial or recreational bodyinstalled. Owners should be awarethat, as manufactured, there aredifferences between a chassis caband a pickup with the box removedwhich could affect vehicle safety.The components necessary to adapta pickup to permit its safe use witha specialized body should beinstalled by the body builder.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9Automatic Transmission Fluid(4-Speed Transmission) . . . 10-11

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-25Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-34Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-35Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-37

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Headlamps (Sierra) . . . . . . . . . 10-40Pick-Up Box Identificationand Fender MarkerLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Taillamps (Chassis CabModels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-44Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-54Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-70When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-76Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-91

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-97Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories tothe vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.


10-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealer andask for GM Accessories, you willknow that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑44.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService WorkIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 13‑14.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑46.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑12.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located inside thevehicle to the left of the brakepedal.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andlocate the secondary hoodrelease. This is located underthe hood, near the center of thegrille.

3. Push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

4. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then bring the hood from fullopen to within 152 mm (6 in)from the closed position, pause,and push the front center of thehood with a swift, firm motion tofully close the hood.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

5.3 L V8 Engine Shown (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V6 Engine, 6.0 L V8 Engine, and 6.2 L V8 Engine Similar)


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑16.

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑17.

C. Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 10‑92.

D. Battery on page 10‑30.

E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10‑92.

F. Automatic TransmissionDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid (4-Speed Transmission)on page 10‑11 or AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6-SpeedTransmission) on page 10‑13.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

I. Engine Cooling Fan. SeeCooling System on page 10‑17.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑25.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See Brake Fluid onpage 10‑28.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑46.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

If the vehicle has a diesel engineand/or an Allison Transmission, seethe Duramax® Diesel Supplement.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

For diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax DieselSupplement.

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is ayellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.


10-8 Vehicle Care

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick,add at least one quart/liter of therecommended oil. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oil thatthe oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range, theengine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:. GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GMStandard GM6094M.

. SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers on anoil container show its viscosity,or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such asSAE 20W-50.

. American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GMStandard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Cold Temperature Operation

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. Always usean oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “WhatKind of Engine Oil to Use” for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the starburstsymbol that meet GM StandardGM6094M are all that is needed forgood performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

On some vehicles, when the systemhas calculated that oil life has beendiminished, a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on toindicate that an oil change isnecessary. See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑44. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600miles). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight not indicate that an oil changeis necessary for over a year.However, the engine oil and filter

must be changed at least once ayear and at this time the systemmust be reset. For vehicles withoutthe CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage, an oil change isneeded when the OIL LIFEREMAINING percentage is near0%. Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this workusing genuine parts and reset thesystem. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.


10-10 Vehicle Care

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

The Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based onvehicle use. Whenever the oil ischanged, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil changeis required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to aCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage coming on, reset thesystem.

Always reset the engine oil life to100% after every oil change. It willnot reset itself. To reset the EngineOil Life System on most vehicles:

1. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, the vehicle must be inP (Park) to access this display.See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑32.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC, or the tripodometer reset stem if thevehicle does not have DICbuttons, for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

On all vehicles, the Engine Oil LifeSystem can be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thedisplay shows 100%, the systemis reset. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑32.

If the vehicle has a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message and itcomes back on when the vehicle isstarted and/or the OIL LIFEREMAINING is near 0%, the EngineOil Life System has not reset.Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Automatic TransmissionFluid (4-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

A good time to check the automatictransmission fluid level is when theengine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 and besure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be best to havethis done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or too littlefluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif you have been driving:. When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).. At high speed for quite a while.. In heavy traffic— especially in

hot weather.. While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 82°C to 93°C(180°F to 200°F).

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 24 km (15 miles) whenoutside temperatures are above10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)until the engine temperature gaugemoves and then remains steady for10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be madeafter the vehicle has been sitting foreight hours or more with the engineoff, but this is used only as areference. Let the engine run at idlefor five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 10°C (50°F) ormore. If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), the engine may have to idlelonger. Should the fluid level be lowduring this cold check, the fluid mustbe checked when hot before addingfluid. Checking the fluid hot will giveyou a more accurate reading of thefluid level.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine, follow these steps:

1. Locate the transmission dipstickhandle with this graphic which islocated at the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 formore information on location.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in the COLDarea, below the cross-hatchedarea, for a cold check or in theHOT or cross-hatched area for ahot check. Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

5. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-13

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8 todetermine what kind of transmissionfluid to use.

Using a funnel, add fluid down thetransmission dipstick tube only afterchecking the transmission fluidwhile it is hot. A cold check is usedonly as a reference. If the fluid levelis low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level up tothe HOT area for a hot check.It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint).Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑8.

. After adding fluid, recheck thefluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Automatic TransmissionFluid (6-SpeedTransmission)

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary tocheck the transmission fluid level.The only reason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to a

dealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑8.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.


10-14 Vehicle Care

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface. Keepthe engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, move theshift lever back to P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle(500 – 800 rpm) for at least1 minute. Slowly release thebrake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andpress the Trip/Fuel button or tripodometer reset stem untilTRANS TEMP (TransmissionTemperature) displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).

6. Using the TRANS TEMPreading, determine and performthe appropriate checkprocedure. If the TRANS TEMPreading is not within the requiredtemperature ranges, allow thevehicle to cool, or operate thevehicle until the appropriatetransmission fluid temperature isreached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluid to beoperated safely until a hot checkprocedure can be made. The hotcheck procedure is the most

accurate method to check the fluidlevel. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure tocheck fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27°C and 32°C (80°Fand 90°F).

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 formore information.



Vehicle Care 10-15

3. Install the dipstick by pushingit back in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter(1 Pint). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check atthe first opportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°Fand 200°F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level.The hot check should be performedat the first opportunity in order toverify the cold check. The fluid levelrises as fluid temperature increases,so it is important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 formore information.


3. Install the dipstick by pushingit back in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.


10-16 Vehicle Care

5. Safe operating level is within theHOT cross hatch band on thedipstick. If the fluid level is notwithin the HOT band, and thetransmission temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°Fand 200°F), add or drain fluid asnecessary to bring the level intothe HOT band. If the fluid level islow, add only enough fluid tobring the level into the HOTband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pint). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Pickup Models” under “EngineAir Cleaner/Filter” in the Duramax®

Diesel Supplement for the correctinspection and replacementprocedures.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information. If driving on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter ateach engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the engine air cleaner/filterfrom the vehicle by followingSteps 1 through 6. When the engineair cleaner/filter is removed, lightlyshake it to release loose dust anddirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains caked with dirt, a new filteris required. Never use compressedair to clean the filter.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

2. Loosen the four screws on thecover of the housing and lift upthe cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Take careto dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tightenthe screws.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Cooling SystemIf the vehicle has the Duramax®

Diesel engine, see the Duramax®

Diesel Supplement for moreinformation.


10-18 Vehicle Care

The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

5.3 L Engine Shown (4.3 L, 4.8 L,6.0 L and, 6.2 L Engines Similar)

A. Coolant Surge Tank

B. Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, theengine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five yearsor 240 000 km (150,000 mi),whichever occurs first.


Vehicle Care 10-19

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature

. Protects against rust andcorrosion

. Will not damage aluminum parts

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in the vehicle'scooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the propermixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for thecooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8 for moreinformation.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a


10-20 Vehicle Care

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, there may be a leak in thecooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank forGasoline Engines

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Cooling System” in theDuramax Diesel Supplement for theproper coolant fill procedure.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.


Vehicle Care 10-21

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant as follows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theengine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90°C (195°F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1 through 6.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has the Duramax®

Diesel engine, see the DuramaxDiesel Supplement for moreinformation.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge on the vehicle's instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑18.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) on theinstrument panel. See EngineCooling System Messages onpage 5‑43 and Engine PowerMessages on page 5‑44.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑7.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning your engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. See OverheatedEngine Protection OperatingMode for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑24 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-23

WARNING (Continued)

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑24 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. Stops after high-speed driving. Idles for long periods in traffic. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing

on page 9‑91.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If stopped in a traffic jam, applythe brake, shift to N (Neutral);otherwise, shift to the highestgear while driving—D (Drive) or3 (Third).

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine conditionexists and the ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED message displays, anoverheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps to prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, a loss in power andengine performance will be noticed.This operating mode allows thevehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Driving extendedmiles (km) and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection modeshould be avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair. Theengine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan, when the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or makingextra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch disengages.

This fan noise may also be heardwhen starting the engine. It will goaway as the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

If the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. Thefans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULLCOLD mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


Vehicle Care 10-27

BrakesThis vehicle has front disc brakesand could have rear drum brakes orrear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,they do not have wear indicators,but if a rear brake rubbing noise isheard, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Rear brakedrums should be removed andinspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing.Drum brakes have an inspectionhole to inspect lining wear duringscheduled maintenance. When thefront brake pads are replaced, havethe rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑27.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


10-30 Vehicle Care

BatteryIf the vehicle is a Hybrid, see theHybrid Supplement for moreinformation.

This vehicle has a maintenance freebattery (or batteries). Refer to thereplacement number on the originalbattery label when a new battery isneeded. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for batterylocation.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑92 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 to determine when tocheck the lubricant.

How to Check Lubricant

Electric Shift Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug


Vehicle Care 10-31

Manual Shift Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

Active Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole. Use carenot to overtighten the plug.

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 to determine how oftento change the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.


10-32 Vehicle Care


To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

1500 Series

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug

All Except 1500 Series

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug. When the differential is cold, add

enough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fill plug hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fillplug hole.

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveledout along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area.Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour ortwo. Remember that the rear axleassembly must be supported to geta true reading.


2500HD with 6.0 L

All Other Series and Engines

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.. For all 4.3 L, 4.8 L and 5.3 L

1500 Series applications, theproper level is 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in)below the bottom of the fill hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.


10-34 Vehicle Care

. For all 6.0 L and 6.2 L 1500Series applications, the properlevel is from 15mm to 40 mm(0.6 in to 1.6 in) below thebottom of the fill plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.

. For all 6.0 L 2500HD Seriesapplications, the properlevel is from 0mm to 13 mm(0 to 0.5 in) below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, located on therear axle. Add only enough fluidto reach the proper level.

. For all 6.6 L Duramax Diesel2500HD Series applications andall 3500 Series applications, theproper level is from 17mm to21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) belowthe bottom of the fill plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.

What to Use


Noise Control SystemThe following information relatesto compliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lbs). The ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2provides information on maintainingthe noise control system to minimizedegradation of the noise emissioncontrol system during the life of yourvehicle. The noise control systemwarranty is given in your warrantybooklet.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person,other than for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for thepurpose of noise control, prior toits sale or delivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after suchdevice or element of design hasbeen removed or renderedinoperative by any person.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering engine speedgovernor, if the vehicle has one,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:. Removal of fan clutch, if the

vehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:. Removal of the air cleaner

silencer.. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:. Removal of the muffler and/or

resonator.. Removal of the exhaust pipes

and exhaust pipe clamps.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑66.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑66.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but do notstart the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, try tomove the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


Vehicle Care 10-37

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information onwiper blade inspection.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. To remove the wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armconnector away from thewindshield.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas oneach side of the blade, and turnthe blade assembly away fromthe arm connector.

3. Install the new blade onto thearm connector and make surethe grooved areas are fully set inthe locked position.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑11.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual opticalheadlamp aiming system. The aimof the headlamps has been presetat the factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their highbeams at you, this may mean thevertical aim of the headlamps needsto be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehiclebe taken to the dealer for service ifthe headlamps need to be adjusted.It is possible, however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.

The vehicle should:. Be placed so the headlamps

are 7.6 m (25 ft) from alight‐colored wall.

. Have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the wayto the wall.

. Be placed so it is perpendicularto the wall.

. Not have any snow, ice, or mudon it.

. Be fully assembled and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being performed.

. Be loaded with a full tank of fueland one person or 75 kg(160 lbs) sitting on thedriver seat.

. Have the tires properly inflated.

. Have the spare tire in its properlocation in the vehicle.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps. Thehigh-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low‐beam headlamp.


Vehicle Care 10-39

3. Record the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp.

4. At a wall, measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a piece ofcardboard or equivalent in frontof the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

The adjustment screw can beturned with an E8 Torx® socket.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.


10-40 Vehicle Care

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑44.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

Headlamps (Sierra)To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5

2. If you are replacing the bulb onthe passenger side, remove theEngine Air Cleaner cover. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑16 for more information.

3. Reach in and access the bulbsockets from inside the enginecompartment.


Vehicle Care 10-41

A. Sidemarker Lamp

B. Low Beam Headlamp

C. High Beam Headlamp

D. Turn Signal Lamp/Parking Lamp

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

5. Unplug the electrical connectorfrom the old bulb by releasingthe clips on the bulb socket.

6. Replace it with a new bulbsocket.

7. Plug in the electrical connectorto the new bulb socket.

8. Reinstall the new bulb socketinto the headlamp assembly andturn it clockwise to secure.

Pick-Up Box Identificationand Fender MarkerLampsThe pick-up box identification lampsare LEDs. For replacement of theLED lighting assembly contact yourdealer.

To replace a pickup box fendermarker lamp bulb:

1. Press the tab from the back toremove the lamp.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove fromthe lamp assembly.

3. Gently pry the bulb from thesocket.

4. Install the new bulb in socket.

5. Reinstall socket into lampassembly.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Taillamps (Chassis CabModels)

A. Backup Lamp

B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/TurnSignal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the four screws.

2. Lift the lens off the lampassembly.

3. Turn the old bulbcounterclockwise and pull the itstraight out from the socket.

4. Install a new bulb into thesocket, turn it clockwise, andpress it in until it is tight.

5. Reinstall the lens and the fourscrews.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgateon page 2‑10 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the two rear lampassembly screws near thetailgate latch strikerpost and pullrearward until disengaging thetwo outer pins on the taillampassembly from the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-43

A. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp

B. Back-up Lamp

C. Sidemarker Lamp

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the old bulb straight outfrom the socket.

5. Press a new bulb into the socketand turn the socket clockwiseinto the taillamp assembly.

6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws and liftoff the lamp assembly.

A. Cargo Lamp

B. Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) Bulb

2. On the reverse side of the lampassembly, remove the bulbsocket by turning it one quarterturn counterclockwise and pull itstraight out.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the socket.

4. Install the bulb by pushing thebulb straight into the socket.


10-44 Vehicle Care

5. Install the bulb socket into thelamp asembly by turning itone quarter turn clockwise.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly andtighten the screws.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Reach under the rear bumper forthe bulb socket.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb socket out of the connector.

3. Pull the old bulb straight outfrom the bulb socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 toreinstall the bulb socket.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 3047 or 921

Back-up Lamp* 1156

Cargo Lamp andCenterHigh-MountedStoplamp(CHMSL)

912

Fender Marker 168

High-BeamHeadlamp

9005

Low-BeamHeadlamp

H11

LicensePlate Lamp

168

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp

3047K

Sidemarker Lamp 194

Stoplamp/TurnSignal Lamp/Taillamp*

1157

* Chassis Cab Models

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Fuses and CircuitBreakersIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

The wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and don't have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you canget along without – like the radio orcigarette lighter – and use its fuse,if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax Diesel supplementfor more information.


The Engine Compartment FuseBlock is located in the enginecompartment, on the driver side ofthe vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Fuses Usage

1Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

2

ElectronicSuspensionControl, AutomaticLevel ControlExhaust

Fuses Usage

3Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

4 Engine Controls

5Engine ControlModule, ThrottleControl

Fuses Usage

6 Trailer BrakeController

7 Front Washer

8 Oxygen Sensor

9Antilock BrakesSystem 2

10Trailer Back-upLamps

11Driver SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

12 Engine ControlModule (Battery)

13Fuel Injectors,Ignition Coils(Right Side)

14TransmissionControl Module(Battery)

15Vehicle Back-upLamps


10-48 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

16Passenger SideLow-BeamHeadlamp

17Air ConditioningCompressor

18 Oxygen Sensors

19TransmissionControls (Ignition)

20 Fuel Pump

21Fuel SystemControl Module

22 Not Used

23 Not Used

24Fuel Injectors,Ignition Coils(Left Side)

25 Trailer Park Lamps

26Driver Side ParkLamps

Fuses Usage

27 Passenger SidePark Lamps

28 Fog Lamps

29 Horn

30Passenger SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

31Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)

32Driver SideHigh-BeamHeadlamp

33Daytime RunningLamps 2

34 Sunroof

35Key IgnitionSystem, TheftDeterrent System

Fuses Usage

36 Windshield Wiper

37SEO B2 UpfitterUsage (Battery)

38Electric AdjustablePedals

39Climate Controls(Battery)

40Airbag System(Ignition)

41 Amplifier

42 Audio System

43Miscellaneous(Ignition), CruiseControl

44 Not Used

45Airbag System(Battery)


Vehicle Care 10-49

Fuses Usage

46 Instrument PanelCluster

47 Power Take-Off

48Auxiliary ClimateControl (Ignition)

49CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

50 Rear Defogger

51 Heated Mirrors

52SEO B1 UpfitterUsage (Battery)

53Cigarette Lighter,Auxiliary PowerOutlet

54SEO UpfitterUsage

Fuses Usage

55 Climate Controls(Ignition)

56

Engine ControlModule, SecondaryFuel Pump(Ignition)

J-CaseFuses

Usage

57 Cooling Fan 1

58 Not Used

59Heavy DutyAntilock BrakeSystem

60 Cooling Fan 2

61Antilock BrakeSystem 1

62 Starter

J-CaseFuses

Usage

63Stud 2 (TrailerBrakes)

64Left BussedElectrical Center 1

65 Not Used

66Heated WindshieldWasher System

67 Transfer Case

68

Stud 1 (TrailerConnectorBattery Power)(Optional - 40AFuse Required)

69Mid-BussedElectrical Center 1

70Climate ControlBlower

71 Not Used

72Left BussedElectrical Center 2


10-50 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage

FAN HI Cooling Fan HighSpeed

FAN LOCooling Fan LowSpeed

FAN CNTRLCooling FanControl

HDLPLO/HID

Low-BeamHeadlamp

FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

STRTR Starter

PWR/TRN Powertrain

FUEL PMP Fuel Pump

PRK LAMP Parking Lamps

REARDEFOG

Rear Defogger

RUN/CRNK Switched Power

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is located on the driverside edge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.

The vehicle may not use all of thefuses shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Rear Seats

2Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

3Steering WheelControls Backlight

4 Driver Door Module

5Dome Lamps, DriverSide Turn Signal

6Driver Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp


Vehicle Care 10-51

Fuses Usage

7 Instrument PanelBack Lighting

8Passenger Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

9Passenger DoorModule, Driver Unlock

10Power Door Lock 2(Unlock Feature)

11Power Door Lock 2(Lock Feature)

12Stoplamps, CenterHigh‐ MountedStoplamp

13 Rear Climate Controls

14 Power Mirror

15Body ControlModule (BCM)

Fuses Usage

16 Accessory PowerOutlets

17 Interior Lamps

18Power Door Lock 1(Unlock Feature)

19Rear SeatEntertainment

20Ultrasonic RearParking Assist, PowerLiftgate

21Power Door Lock 1(Lock Feature)

22Driver InformationCenter (DIC)

23 Rear Wiper

24 Cooled Seats

Fuses Usage

25Driver Seat Module,Remote Keyless EntrySystem

26Driver Power DoorLock (Unlock Feature)

CircuitBreaker

Usage

LT DRDriver Side PowerWindow CircuitBreaker

HarnessConnector Usage

LT DRDriver DoorHarnessConnection

BODY Harness Connector

BODY Harness Connector


10-52 Vehicle Care

Center Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The center instrument panel fuseblock is located underneath theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

Top View

HarnessConnector Usage

BODY 2Body HarnessConnector 2



HEADLINER3

Headliner HarnessConnector 3

HEADLINER2


HEADLINER1


SEO/UPFITTER

Special EquipmentOption UpfitterHarness Connector

CircuitBreaker Usage

CB1Passenger SidePower Window CircuitBreaker

CB2Passenger SeatCircuit Breaker

CB3Driver Seat CircuitBreaker

CB4 Rear Sliding Window


Vehicle Care 10-53

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have a blowout and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Under inflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when yourtires are cold.

. Over inflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If your tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only yourdealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation on page 10‑62 for inflationpressure adjustment for high speeddriving.


10-54 Vehicle Care

20‐Inch Tires

If your vehicle has the optional20‐inch P275/55R20 size tires,they are classified as touringtires and are designed for onroad use. The low‐profile,wide tread design is notrecommended for “off‐road”driving or commercial uses suchas snow plowing. See Off-RoadDriving on page 9‑7 and Addinga Snow Plow or SimilarEquipment on page 9‑120 foradditional information.

Notice: If the vehicle haslow‐profile tires, they are moresusceptible to damage fromroad hazards or curb impactthan standard profile tires.Tire and/or wheel assemblydamage can occur whencoming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes,or sharp edged objects,or when sliding into a curb.

The vehicle warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Thefollowing illustrations areexamples of a typical P‐Metricand a LT‐Metric tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


Vehicle Care 10-55

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured.

The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 10‑74 .

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑61 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23 .

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


10-56 Vehicle Care

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure on page10‑61 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23 .

(D) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with the

U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured. TheTIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one sidemay have the date ofmanufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(G) Single Tire MaximumLoad: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommended

tire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑61 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23 .

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following examples showthe different parts of a tire size.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.


Vehicle Care 10-57

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire

(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric)Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meansa light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the light truck(LT‐Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.


10-58 Vehicle Care

(F) Load Range : Load Range.

(G) Service Description: Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weight ofoptional accessories. Someexamples of optionalaccessories are, automatic

transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑61 .

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑23 .


Vehicle Care 10-59

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23 .

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23 .

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23 .

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑61andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23 .


10-60 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑70 .

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑74 .

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23 .

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23 .


Vehicle Care 10-61

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximumload-carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight yourvehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23 . Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ride

comfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget to check thepressure of the spare tire, if yourvehicle has one. See Full-SizeSpare Tire on page 10‑91 foradditional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).


10-62 Vehicle Care

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the pressure is low, add airuntil you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P265/70R17 or P275/55R20 size tires require inflationpressure adjustment when drivingthe vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tireinflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi)above the recommended cold tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

When you end this high‐speeddriving, return the tires to the coldinflation pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑23and Tire Pressure on page 10‑61.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑64 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle's tires and transmits thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS will illuminatethe low tire pressure warningsymbol located on the instrumentpanel cluster. If the warning lightcomes on, stop as soon as possible

and inflate the tires to therecommended pressure shown onthe tire loading information label.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23.

At the same time a message tocheck the pressure in a specific tireappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. If your vehicle has DICbuttons, tire pressure levels can beviewed by the driver. For additionalinformation and details about theDIC operation and displays seeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑32 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑47.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that the

air pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle's tires when they are cold.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑23, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑61.

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑67, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑68 and Tires onpage 10‑53.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle until

the problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off once youre‐install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑71.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.


10-66 Vehicle Care

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time yourotate your vehicle's tires or replaceone or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing thetire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.

To decrease air-pressure out of atire you can use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longerthan two minutes, to match the firsttire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter's LOCK andUNLOCK buttons at the sametime for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiver is inrelearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

If your vehicle does not haveRKE, press the DriverInformation Center (DIC) vehicleinformation button until thePRESS V TO RELEARN TIREPOSITIONS message displays.The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

If your vehicle does not haveRKE or DIC buttons, press thetrip odometer reset stem locatedon the instrument panel clusteruntil the PRESS V TORELEARN TIRE POSITIONSmessage displays. The hornsounds twice to signal thereceiver is in relearn mode andTIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.


Vehicle Care 10-67

5. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire's air pressurefor five seconds, or until ahorn chirp sounds. The hornchirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirmsthat the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thistire and wheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn soundstwo times to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and that the TPMS sensormatching process is no longer

active. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage at least oncea month.

Always remove the tires if any ofthe following statementsare true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 miles). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 .

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that your vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate your tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires onpage 10‑70 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑76 .

If your vehicle has dual rearwheels, also see Dual TireRotation on page 10‑70 .

If your vehicle has single rearwheels and the tread design forthe front tires is the same as therear tires, use the rotationpattern shown here whenrotating the tires.

If your vehicle has dual rearwheels and the tread design forthe front tires is the same as therear tires, always use one of thecorrect rotation patterns shownhere when rotating the tires.


Vehicle Care 10-69

If your vehicle has dual rearwheels and the tread design forthe front tires is different fromthe dual rear tires, always usethe correct rotation patternshown here when rotating thetires.

The dual tires are rotated as apair, and the inside rear tiresbecome the outside rear tires.

When you install dual wheels,be sure the vent holes in theinner and outer wheels on eachside are lined up.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑61 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑23 .

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 .

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑78.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

If your vehicle has a TirePressure Monitor System(TPMS), reset the TPMSsensors after rotating the tires.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page10‑64 .


10-70 Vehicle Care

Make sure the spare tire, if yourvehicle has one, is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. See“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑80 .

Dual Tire RotationWhen the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel boltor wheel nut is replaced, checkthe wheel nut torque after160, 1 600, and 10 000 km(100, 1,000, and 6,000 miles) ofdriving. For proper torque and wheelnut tightening information, see“Removing the Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑80.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setupgenerally wears faster than theinner tire. Your tires will wear moreevenly and last longer if you rotatethe tires periodically, see TireInspection on page 10‑67 and TireRotation on page 10‑68. Also seeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

{ WARNING

If you operate your vehicle with atire that is badly underinflated, thetire can overheat. An overheatedtire can lose air suddenly or catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Be sure all tires (includingthe spare) are properly inflated.

See Tire Pressure on page 10‑61,for information on proper tireinflation.

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See Tire


Vehicle Care 10-71

Inspection on page 10‑68 and TireRotation on page 10‑68 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This is also true for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnot being used. Multiple conditionsaffect how fast this aging takesplace, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. Tires willtypically need to be replaced due towear before they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installed onyour vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General MotorsTire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPCSpec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the originaltires.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle,including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM's TPCSpec number is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC spec number willbe followed by an MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 10‑54 for additionalinformation.


10-72 Vehicle Care

GM recommends replacing tires insets of four. This is because uniformtread depth on all tires will helpkeep your vehicle performing mostlike it did when the tires were new.Replacing less than a full set of tirescan affect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑67 andTire Rotation on page 10‑68 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. You or otherscould be injured or killed if youattempt to mount or dismount atire. Only your dealer or anauthorized tire service centershould mount and dismount thetires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause you tolose control while driving. If youmix tires of different sizes,brands, or types (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehiclemight not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Usingtires of different sizes, brands,or types could also causedamage to your vehicle. Be sureto use the same size, brand, andtype of tires on all wheels.

Your vehicle may have a differentsize spare than the road tires(those originally installed on yourvehicle). When new, your vehicleincluded a spare tire and wheelassembly with a similar overalldiameter as your vehicle's roadtires and wheels, so it is all rightto drive on it. Because this sparewas developed for use on yourvehicle, it will not affect vehiclehandling.

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle'stires with those that do not have aTPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system may give aninaccurate low‐pressure warning ifnon‐TPC Spec-rated tires areinstalled on your vehicle. Non‐TPCSpec-rated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that is higheror lower than the proper warninglevel you would get with TPCSpec-rated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10‑62.

Your vehicle's original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑23for more information about the Tireand Loading Information label andits location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are adifferent size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking, rideand handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑71 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading

(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it(except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts orTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

Whenever a wheel, wheelbolt or wheel nut is replacedon a dual wheel setup, check thewheel nut torque after100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) ofdriving. For proper torque, see“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑78 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

If your vehicle has dual wheels orP265/65R18, P275/55R20 orLT265/70R17 size tires, do notuse tire chains. They can damageyour vehicle because there is notenough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause you tolose control of your vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Tohelp avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and donot spin your vehicle's wheels.

If you do find traction devices thatwill fit, install them on the reartires.

Notice: If your vehicle does nothave dual wheels and has a tiresize other than P265/65R18, P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17, use tirechains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use chains thatare the proper size for your tires.Install them on the tires of therear axle. Do not use chains onthe tires of the front axle. Tightenthem as tightly as possible withthe ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chainmanufacturer's instructions.If you can hear the chainscontacting your vehicle, stop andretighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until itstops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage your vehicle.


10-78 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunder-inflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely under-inflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next partshows how to use the jackingequipment to change a flat tiresafely.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑5 .


Vehicle Care 10-79

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fall onyou or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or evenkilled. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, besure the transfer case is in adrive gear – not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be even more certain thevehicle will not move, put blocksat the front and rear of the tirefarthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tireon the other side, at the oppositeend of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

Crew Cab

A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit

B. Tool Kit

C. Wheel Blocks

D. Jack

E. Jack Knob

F. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

Regular Cab


B. Tool Kit

C. Wheel Blocks

D. Jack

E. Jack Knob

F. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

Extended Cab


B. Tool Kit

C. Wheel Blocks

D. Jack

E. Jack Knob


Vehicle Care 10-81

For regular cab models, theequipment you will need is behindthe passenger seat. For extendedand crew cab models, theequipment is on the shelf behind thepassenger side second row seat.

1. Turn the knob on the jackcounterclockwise to lower thejack head to release the jackfrom its holder.

2. Remove the wheel blocks andthe wheel block retainer byturning the wing nutcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the wing nut used toretain the storage bag and toolsby turning it counterclockwise.

You will use the jack handleextensions and the wheel wrench toremove the underbody-mountedspare tire.

A. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Hoist Assembly

C. Hoist Cable

D. Tire/Wheel Retainer

E. Hoist Shaft

F. Hoist End of Extension Tool

G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

H. Wheel Wrench

I. Jack Handle Extensions

J. Spare Tire Lock (If equipped)

1. Open the spare tire lock coveron the bumper and use theignition key to remove the sparetire lock (J). To remove the sparetire lock, insert the ignition keyturn and pull straight out.

2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H)and the two jack handleextensions (I) as shown.


10-82 Vehicle Care

3. Insert the hoist end (openend) (F) of the extension throughthe hole (G) in the rear bumper.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (F) connects to thehoist shaft (E). The ribbedsquare end of the extension isused to lower the spare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrench (H)counterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheel

wrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

5. Pull the spare tire out from underthe vehicle.

6. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.

Tilt the retainer and pull itthrough the center of the wheelalong with the cable and spring.

7. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Use the following pictures andinstructions to remove the flat tireand raise the vehicle.

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A), the wheel blocks (B),the jack handle (C), the jack handleextensions (D), and the wheelwrench (E).

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑78 for moreinformation.


Vehicle Care 10-83

2. If your vehicle has wheel nutcaps, loosen them by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwise.

If the vehicle has a center capwith wheel nut caps, the wheelnut caps are designed to staywith the center cap after they areloosened. Remove the entirecenter cap.

If the wheel has a smooth centercap, place the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the slot on thewheel, and gently pry it out.

3. Use the wheel wrench and turn itcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not remove thewheel nuts yet.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Front Position - 1500 Models

4. Position the jack under thevehicle as shown. If the flat tireis on the front of the vehicle(1500Model vehicles), positionthe jack under the bracketattached to the vehicle's frame,behind the flat tire.

Front Position - All Other Models

Position the jack under thevehicle as shown. If the flat tireis on the front of the vehicle (allother models), position the jackon the frame behind the flat tire.

Rear Position – 1500 Models

5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for1500 models position the jackunder the rear axle about2 inches (5 cm) inboard of theshock absorber bracket.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Rear Position – All Other Models

For all other models, position thejack under the rear axle betweenthe spring anchor and the shockabsorber bracket.

If you have added a snow plowto the front of your vehicle, lowerthe snow plow fully beforeraising the vehicle.

Make sure that the jack head ispositioned so that the rear axleis resting securely between thegrooves that are on thejack head.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to fitunder the wheel well.

7. Remove all the wheel nuts andtake off the flat tire.


10-86 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑78.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

9. Install the spare tire.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel.

11. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ WARNING

If wheel studs are damaged, theycan break. If all the studs on awheel broke, the wheel couldcome off and cause a crash.If any stud is damaged becauseof a loose-running wheel, it couldbe that all of the studs aredamaged. To be sure, replace allstuds on the wheel. If the studholes in a wheel have becomelarger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel ifits stud holes have become largeror distorted in any way. Inspect

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-87

WARNING (Continued)

hubs and hub‐piloted wheels fordamage. Because of looserunning wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and requirereplacement of the entire hub, forproper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs,wheel nuts or wheels, be sure touse GM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheel

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

nuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

13. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

For vehicles with dual wheels, havea technician check the wheel nuttightness of all wheels with a torquewrench after the first 100 miles(160 km) and then 1,000 miles(1600 km) after that. Repeat thisservice whenever you have a tireremoved or serviced. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for more information.


10-88 Vehicle Care

When you reinstall the regularwheel and tire, you must alsoreinstall either the center cap,or bolt-on hub cap, depending onwhat your vehicle is equipped with.For center caps, place the cap onthe wheel and tap it into place untilit seats flush with the wheel. Thecap only goes on one way. Be sureto line up the tab on the center capwith the indentation on the wheel.For bolt-on hub caps, align theplastic nut caps with the wheel nutsand then tighten by hand. Then usethe wheel wrench to tighten.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminumwheel with a flat tire under yourvehicle for an extended period oftime or with the valve stempointing up can damage thewheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointingdown and have the wheel/tirerepaired as soon as possible.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

A. Flat or Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Hoist Assembly

C. Hoist Cable

D. Tire/Wheel Retainer

E. Hoist Shaft

F. Hoist End of Extension Tool

G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

H. Wheel Wrench


Vehicle Care 10-89

I. Jack Handle Extensions

J. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)

1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle with the valvestem pointed down, and tothe rear.

2. Pull the cable and springthrough the center of the wheel.Tilt the wheel retainer platedown and through the centerwheel.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) andextensions (I) together, asshown.

4. Insert the hoist end (F) throughthe hole (G) in the rear bumperand onto the hoist shaft.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is seatedin the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.


10-90 Vehicle Care

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrench totighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock,if the vehicle has one.

To store the jack and jack tools:

A. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit

D. Wheel Wrench and Extensions

E. Tool Bag

F. Jack Mounting Bracket

G. Jack

H. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks

1. Put the tools (D) in the toolbag (E) and place them in theretaining bracket (C).

2. Tighten down the wing nut (C).

3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B)and jack (G) together with thewing nut (A) and retainingbolt (H).

4. Position the jack (G) in themounting bracket (F). Positionthe holes in the base of thejack (G) onto the pin in themounting bracket (F).

5. Return them to their originallocation in the vehicle. For moreinformation, refer to “Removingthe Spare Tire and Tools” formore information.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Full-Size Spare TireYour vehicle, when new, had afully-inflated spare tire. A spare tiremay lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See TirePressure on page 10‑61 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑23 forinformation regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle.For instruction on how to remove,install or store a spare tire, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare” and “Storing aFlat or Spare Tire and Tools” underTire Changing on page 10‑80.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have your flattire repaired and/or replaced. Youcould damage the vehicle, andthe repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Neveruse four-wheel drive when thedifferent size spare tire isinstalled on the vehicle.

Your vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on your vehicle.This spare tire was developed foruse on your vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If your vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed, keep thevehicle in two-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on yourvehicle, you should stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired orreplaced as soon as you can andinstalled back onto your vehicle.This way, the spare tire will beavailable in case you need it again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If your vehicle has aspare tire that does not match yourvehicle's original road tires andwheels in size and type, do notinclude the spare in the tire rotation.


10-92 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. If you have a vehicle with adiesel engine with two batteries,you should know before youbegin that, especially in coldweather, you may not be able toget enough power from a singlebattery in another vehicle to startyour diesel engine. If yourvehicle has more than onebattery, using the battery that iscloser to the starter will reduceelectrical resistance. This islocated on the passenger side,in the rear of the enginecompartment.


Vehicle Care 10-93

3. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause an unwantedground connection. You wouldnot be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If you have a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, not inNeutral.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by the

warranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

4. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all the lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

5. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal, islocated under a red plastic coverat the positive battery post. Touncover the positive (+) terminal,open the red plastic cover.

If your vehicle has a gasolineengine, the remote negative (-)terminal is a stud located on theright front of the engine, wherethe negative battery cableattaches.

If your vehicle has a dieselengine, the remote negative (-)terminal is the negative (-) poston the auxiliary battery on thedriver side of the enginecompartment.


10-94 Vehicle Care

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals, seeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

6. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0Land 6.2L similar)

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the vehicle with the deadbattery.

8. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

9. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto the remote negative (−)terminal, on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.


10-96 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the bad battery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) terminalcover, to its original position.


Vehicle Care 10-97

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑7.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Recreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motorhome. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles shouldnot be towed with all four wheels onthe ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure todinghy tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle:

1. Position the vehicle being towedbehind the tow vehicle and shiftthe transmission to P (Park).

2. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake.

3. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

{ WARNING

Shifting a four-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). The driver or otherscould be injured. Make sure theparking brake is firmly set beforethe transfer case is shifted toN (Neutral).

4. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoNeutral” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 9‑52 for the properprocedure to select the Neutralposition for the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-99

5. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key— thesteering wheel will still turn.

After towing, see “Shifting Out ofNeutral” under Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑52 for the proper procedureto take the vehicle out of the Neutralposition.

Dolly Towing

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Two-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Notice: If a two-wheel-drivevehicle is towed with the rearwheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Nevertow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with the rear wheels onthe ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drivevehicle, the vehicle must be towedwith the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)” later in this section formore information.


10-100 Vehicle Care

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Four-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

4. Firmly set the parking brake.

{ WARNING


5. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

7. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoNeutral” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 9‑52 for the properprocedure to select the neutralposition for the vehicle.

8. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.


After towing, see “Shifting Out ofNeutral” under Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑52.


Vehicle Care 10-101

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)

Two‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a two-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑66.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).




Four‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑66.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).



10-102 Vehicle Care


{ WARNING


7. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoNeutral” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 9‑52 for the properprocedure to select the neutralposition for the vehicle.


After towing, see “Shifting Out ofNeutral” under Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑52.

Appearance Care

Exterior CareSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑8.

Washing the Vehicle

The best way to preserve thevehicle's finish is to keep it clean bywashing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturers'directions regarding correct productusage, necessary safetyprecautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.


Vehicle Care 10-103

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 inches) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8 274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle”.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To helpkeep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However, chromepolish may be used on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.


10-104 Vehicle Care

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap and abuildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels and Trim

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calciumor sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the vehicle'schrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because they coulddamage the surface. Do not usechrome polish on aluminum wheels.


Vehicle Care 10-105

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.


10-106 Vehicle Care

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 months or20 000 km (12,000 miles) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continue tolook its best if it is cleaned often.Although not always visible, dustand dirt can accumulate on theupholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles

from the upholstery. It is important tokeep the upholstery from becomingand remaining heavily soiled. Soilsshould be removed as quickly aspossible. The vehicle's interior mayexperience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may requiremore frequent cleaning. Use carebecause newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to homefurnishings may also transfer colorto the vehicle's interior.

When cleaning the vehicle's interior,only use cleaners specificallydesigned for the surfaces beingcleaned. Permanent damage mayresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to thecleaning cloth.


Vehicle Care 10-107

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage to therear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents thatmay become concentrated in thevehicle's breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from smallbuttons and knobs using a smallbrush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors fromthe vehicle's upholstery and cleanthe vehicle's glass can be obtainedfrom your dealer.

Do not clean the vehicle using:. A knife or any other sharp object

to remove a soil from any interiorsurface.

. A stiff brush. It can causedamage to the vehicle's interiorsurfaces.

. Heavy pressure or aggressiverubbing with a cleaning cloth.Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residuethat streaks and attracts dirt. Forliquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of water is agood guide. Use only mild,neutral-pH soaps.

. Too much cleaner that saturatesthe upholstery.

. Organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc. that candamage the vehicle's interior.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment frequently toremove dust and loose dirt.A canister vacuum with a beater barin the nozzle may only be used onfloor carpet and carpeted floor mats.For any soil, always try to remove itfirst with plain water or club soda.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible usingone of the following techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.


10-108 Vehicle Care

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to removeexcess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiledarea until the cleaning clothremains clean.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plainwater.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner orspot lifter is to be used, test a smallhidden area for colorfastness first.

If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation mayresult, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has beencompleted, a paper towel can beused to blot excess moisture fromthe fabric or carpet.

Leather

A soft cloth dampened with watercan be used to remove dust. If amore thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry.Never use steam to clean leather.Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interior

because they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl andother Plastic Surfaces

A soft cloth dampened with watermay be used to remove dust. If amore thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatingsthat are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces maypermanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing the glossin a non-uniform manner.


Vehicle Care 10-109

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashor injury. Make sure the floor matdoes not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayiterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


10-110 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-12

General InformationThis maintenance section appliesto vehicles with a gasoline engine.For diesel engine vehicles, see themaintenance schedule section inthe Duramax Diesel Supplement.

Notice: Maintenance intervals,checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑23.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Are driven off-road in therecommended manner.See Off-Road Driving onpage 9‑7 .

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑82.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can becertain that you will receive thehighest level of service available.Your dealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipment toensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑11. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑68.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter.See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.An Emission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC),service is required for the vehicleas soon as possible, within the next1 000 km/600 miles. If driving underthe best conditions, the engine oillife system might not indicate theneed for vehicle service for morethan a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once ayear and the oil life system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice technicians who will performthis work and reset the system.



If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7 andEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9. An Emission ControlService.

. Engine coolant level check.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑102. Worn ordamaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑37.

. Tire inflation pressures check.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑61.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑67.

. Rotate tires if necessary. SeeTire Rotation on page 10‑68.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. For vehicles with AllisonTransmission® only: At the firstengine oil change only, replaceexternal transmission filter.

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspectionfor damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Lubricate the front suspension,steering linkage, and parkingbrake cable guides. Controlarm ball joints on 2500/3500series vehicles requirelubrication but should notbe lubricated unless theirtemperature is −12°C (10°F)or higher, or they could bedamaged. Control arm ball jointson 1500 series vehicles aremaintenance‐free. Vehicles usedunder severe commercialoperating conditions requirelubrication on a regular basisevery 5 000 km/3,000 miles.



. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, folding seathardware, and tailgate hinges,linkage, and handle pivot pointslubrication. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑8. More frequentlubrication may be requiredwhen the vehicle is exposedto a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean clothmakes them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑26.

. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. Vehicles with diesel engine orGVWR above 4 536 kg(10,000 lbs) only: Shieldsinspection for damage orlooseness. Adjust or replaceas required. This is a NoiseEmission Control Service.Applicable to vehicles sold in theUnited States and recommendedfor vehicles sold in Canada.

Additional Required Services

At the First 160 km/100 Miles,1 600 km/1,000 Miles, and10 000 km/6,000 Miles. For vehicles with dual wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque.For proper torque, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should

be rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑68.



At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.. Engine coolant level check.

See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑26.

Once a Month. Tire inflation pressures check.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑61.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑67.

. Sunroof track and sealinspection, if equipped.See Sunroof (Extended Cab) onpage 2‑20 or Sunroof (CrewCab) on page 2‑21.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑35.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑36.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑36.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑36.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Underbody flushing service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer

case fluid change (extreme dutyservice) for vehicles mainlydriven off‐road in four‐wheeldrive. Vehicles used for farming,mining, forestry, Department ofNatural Resources (DNR), andsnow plowing occupations meetthis definition. Check vent hoseat transfer case for kinks andproper installation. Check to besure vent hose is unobstructed,clear, and free of debris. Duringany maintenance, if a powerwasher is used to clean mudand dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to notdirectly spray the transfer caseoutput seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.



First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑16.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles with Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) over3 901 kg (8,600 lbs) or mainlydriven in heavy city traffic in hotweather, in hilly or mountainousterrain, when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid(4-Speed Transmission) onpage 10‑11 or AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6-SpeedTransmission) on page 10‑13.

. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severeservice) for vehicles mainlydriven when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. Check venthose at transfer case for kinksand proper installation. Checkto be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris. During any maintenance,if a power washer is used toclean mud and dirt from theunderbody, care should be takento not directly spray the transfercase output seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed.An Emission Control Service.The U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Boardhas determined that the failureto perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.



First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid(4-Speed Transmission) onpage 10‑11 or AutomaticTransmission Fluid (6-SpeedTransmission) on page 10‑13.

. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (normalservice). Check vent hose attransfer case for kinks andproper installation. Check to besure vent hose is unobstructed,clear, and free of debris. During

any maintenance, if a powerwasher is used to clean mudand dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to notdirectly spray the transfer caseoutput seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or every fiveyears, whichever occurs first).See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑18. An Emission ControlService.

. Engine drive belts inspection forfraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage (or every10 years, whichever occursfirst). Replace, if needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or anAllison Transmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX® Diesel manual.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle's engine,see Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑18.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,in Canada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power Steering SystemGM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).




Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Floor Shift LinkageLubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2Category LB or GC-LB.

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Axle (1500 Series) ‐Four‐Wheel Drive

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021671, inCanada 89021672).

Front Axle (1500, 2500 HD, and3500 HD Series)

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678).

Rear AxleSAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678).

Transfer Case (Four‐Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.




Front Axle Propshaft Spline orOne-Piece Propshaft Spline

(Two-Wheel Drive with 4‐Speed Auto.Trans.)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,in Canada 10953511).

Rear Driveline Center SplineChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Body Door Hinge Pins, TailgateHinge and Linkage, Folding Seats,

and Fuel Door Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges,Latch Bolt, and Linkage

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

Weatherstrip SqueaksSynthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*

High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C

Oil Filter

4.3L V6 25010792 PF47

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

4.3L V6 12568387 41-101

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —

*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading




Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-6

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8 for more information.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

4.3L V6 1500 Series 15.6 L 16.5 qt

4.8L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt

5.3L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt

6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 15.5 L 16.4 qt

6.2L V8 1500 Series 15.9 L 16.8 qt


Technical Data 12-3


Metric English

Engine Oil with Filter

4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt

4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

1500 Series Standard and Short Box 98.4 L 26.0 gal

1500 Series Long Box 128.7 L 34.0 gal

2500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal

2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal

3500 Series Chassis Cab 240.4 L 63.5 gal

3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank 89.0 L 23.5 gal

3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped) 151.4 L 40.0 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt


12-4 Technical Data


Metric English

Transmission Fluid - Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic Transmission 4.7 L 5.0 qt

6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E 5.7 L 6.0 qt

6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E 6.0 L 6.3 qt

6-Speed Transmission Allison 7.0 L 7.4 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 ft lb

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-5

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

4.3L V6 (LU3) X Automatic 1.52 mm (0.060 in)

4.8L V8 (L20) A Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

5.3L V8 FlexFuel with ActiveFuel Management™ (IronBlock) (LMG)

0 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

5.3L V8 FlexFuel with ActiveFuel Management™(AluminumBlock) (LC9)


6.0L V8 (Iron Block) B Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (L96) G Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

6.2L V8 FlexFuel (AluminumBlock) (L9H)



12-6 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

V6 Engines

V8 Engines




Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (United Statesand Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(United States andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(United States andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-12Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-17OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-18Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (United Statesand Canada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782, CustomerAssistance prompt. In Canada,call General Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title,or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility.That is why we suggest followingStep One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,you can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairsor the interpretation of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Althoughyou may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution programprior to filling out a court action, useof the program is free of charge and

your case will generally be heardwithin 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed withany other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should beaccompanied by the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with your newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of yourvehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.



However, we recognize that despitethe good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

Step One

Explain your case to the dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

Step Two

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or thedealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

Step Three

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(United States and Canada) onpage 13‑4 or Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico) on page 13‑5 formore information.

Customer AssistanceOffices (United Statesand Canada)GMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1‐800‐GMC‐8782(1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-462-8782



From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

Front U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0801Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0812

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0812

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8191

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with GMC by dialing:1-800-462-8583. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

GMC Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmcownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Store online service and

maintenance records

. GMC dealer locator for servicenationwide

. Exclusive privileges and offers

. Recall notices for your specificvehicle

. OnStar® and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries

Other Helpful Links

GMC — www.gmc.com

GMC Merchandise —www.gmccollection.com

Help Center — www.gmc.com/helpcenter. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada(Canada) — www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gm.ca.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, suchas hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.comor call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (United Statesand Canada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐462‐8782; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN),and delivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.



GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if youhave OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle wasin a crash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America whenrequested either with themost direct route or the mostscenic route. Additional travelinformation is also available.Allow three weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefitsand Assistance: If yourtrip is interrupted due to awarranty failure, incidentalexpenses may be reimbursedduring the 5 years/(160 000 km)100,000 miles Powertrainwarranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals, andrental car.



Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limitof six requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefitsand Assistance: Must beover 250 kilometres fromwhere your trip was startedto qualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service:If assistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

For detailed information aboutRoadside Assistance, please seethe brochure provided with your newvehicle or visit our website at:www.gmc.com.mx. Navigate the siteand click on “Asistencia en elCamino.” E-mail correspondenceshould be sent to:[email protected].

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0801

United States

1-866-466-8902

Canada

1-800-268-6800



Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a serviceappointment and advising yourservice consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offeryou one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.



Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer's shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GMfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amountsfor reimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange toprovide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse youfor a rental vehicle that you obtainif your vehicle is kept for anovernight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited andmust be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local,and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements varyand may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may alsobe responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage,or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time andto resolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.



Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle'sresale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are madeby companies other than GMand may not have been testedfor your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosionproblems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions.

Aftermarket parts are not coveredby your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts is not coveredby that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.



Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure thatyour vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑7.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, and

telephone number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, and

telephone number. Vehicle license plate number. Vehicle make, model, and

model year. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Insurance company and policy

number. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑34.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify tothe facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered byyour GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for therepair, but you must live with therepair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may

initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if your vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.



Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.



Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Active Fuel Management™ . . . . 9-41Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-44

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10AirbagLight On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-34

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-30AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-23Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-47

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20


i-2 INDEX

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-13Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-43Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11, 10-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

AuxiliaryRoof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-37Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-32Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-44Pickup-Box Identificationand Fender MarkerLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71


INDEX i-3

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-82Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-76Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CDDVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-24CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-36

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-55

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-64, 3-66, 3-75Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-53

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106

Climate Control Systems . . .8-1, 8-4Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4, 13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-14

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3


i-4 INDEX

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-17Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-88

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-19If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-22Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Dual TireRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-119

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17


INDEX i-5

Engine (cont.)Cooling System Messages . . .5-43Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-16Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-42Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-107Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-17Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12

FilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-109FluidAutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . 10-11, 10-13

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-30, 9-52Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-29Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Front Fog LampsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-83E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-84Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-87

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-85Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-83Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-82Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-31Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-41Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-82Requirements, California . . . . .9-82System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45


i-6 INDEX

Fuel EconomyDriving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-91FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-58Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-82

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-16Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Gauges (cont.)Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-87Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-31High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-62Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-19Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-67Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15


INDEX i-7

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-45Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-54Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45LampsAuxiliary RoofMounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lamps (cont.)Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-25Pick-Up Box Identificationand Fender Marker . . . . . . . . 10-41

Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-55


i-8 INDEX

Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

LightsAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-30Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Lights (cont.)Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-19Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-29Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-31Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Transfer Case Vent Filter . . . . .9-52

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-25Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-47Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42


INDEX i-9

Messages (cont.)Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-43Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Object Detection System . . . . .5-45Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-46Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Mirrors (cont.)Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

NNavigation SystemVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-34

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-47Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-22


i-10 INDEX

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-36

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-41Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-39Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-123

Pickup-Box Identificationand Fender MarkerLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-35Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70

Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-45

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 3-11Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-76Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19


INDEX i-11

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-46Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-16General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20, 2-21

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-6Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-27Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-25

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-16General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9


i-12 INDEX

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 3-11Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . 3-64, 3-66, 3-75

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-12Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Service (cont.)Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-44

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-120Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-29StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-35Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Starting the VehicleMesssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-21SwitchesAirbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemNoise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34


INDEX i-13

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-78Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-64Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-47Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-62Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Tires (cont.)Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-76When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-29TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-88Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-107General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-87Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-97Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-91Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-119

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . .9-119Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91

Transfer CaseVent Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-11, 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-74Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-58Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


i-14 INDEX

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Vent FilterTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

WWarning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-50WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Where to Put the ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-37

Documents

GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) 2011 GMC Sierra Owner Manual M€¦ · · 2011-10-24GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate ... GMC Sierra Owner Manual - 2011